COPYRIGHT
A Copyright.qxd 10/28/98 9:50 AM Page 1
COPYRIGHT
Fujitsu PC Corporation has made every effort to
ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document.
However, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we
cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this
document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions,
or future changes.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and
MMX technolory is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
PC-Doctor is a trademark of Watergate Software, Inc.
SoftPEG is a registered trademark of
CompuCore Multimedia Inc.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
according to FCC Part 15
LapLink is a registered trademark of
Traveling Software Inc.
Responsible Party Name: Fujitsu PC Corporation
Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks
and LifeBook is a trademark of Fujitsu Limited.
AudioRack is a registered trademark of
ESS Technology, Inc.
Built for Humans and ErgoTrac are trademarks of
Fujitsu PC Corporation.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are the
property of their respective owners.
The following are registered trademarks of
IBM Corporation: IBM, IBM PC AT, IBM PS/2.
We cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of
this document. We disclaim liability for errors,
omissions, or future changes.
The following are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation: MS, MS-DOS, Windows 95,
Windows 98, Windows NT.
PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer
Memory Card International Association.
Phoenix, Phoenix logo, Power Panel, Card Executive
and NoteDock are registered trademarks of
Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
© Copyright 1998 Fujitsu PC Corporation. All rights
reserved. No part of this publication may be copied,
reproduced, or translated, without prior written
consent of Fujitsu PC Corporation. No part of this
publication may be stored or transmitted in any
electronic form without the written consent of
Fujitsu PC Corporation.
Address: 598 Gibraltar Drive
Milpitas, CA 95035
Telephone: (408) 935-8800
Declares that product: Model: LifeBook E330.
LifeBook E335.
LifeBook E340.
LifeBook E350.
Complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operations is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device must not be allowed to cause harmful
interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
David Woo
 
Fujitsu

9/4/98

A Copyright.qxd 10/28/98 9:50 AM Page 2
CAUTION
Changes or modification not expressly approved
by Fujitsu PC Corporation could void this user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FCC NOTICES
Notice to Users of Radios and Television
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
■
■
■
■
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on
a different circuit than the receiver.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with
this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device.
Notice to Users of the US Telephone Network
The LifeBook™ E Series notebook computers may be
supplied with an internal modem which complies
with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On this notebook is
a label that contains the FCC Registration Number
and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this
equipment among other information. If requested,
the user must provide their telephone company with
the following information:
1. The telephone number to which the notebook
is connected.
2. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for
this equipment.
3. That the equipment requires a standard modular
jack type USOC RJ-11C which is FCC
Part 68 compliant.
4. The FCC Registration Number.
This equipment is designed to be connected to the
telephone network or premises wiring using a standard
modular jack type USOC RJ-11C which is FCC Part 68
compliant and a line cord between the modem and the
telephone network with a minimum of 26AWG.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices
that you may connect to your telephone line and still
have all of those devices ring when your number is
called. Too many devices on one line may result in
failure to ring in response to an incoming call. In most,
but not all, areas the sum of the RENs of all of the
devices should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of
the number of devices you may connect to your line,
as determined by the RENs, contact your local
telephone company.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, your telephone company may discontinue your
service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you
in advance. If advance notice is not practical they will
notify you as soon as possible. You will also be advised
of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
This fax modem also complies with fax branding
requirements per FCC Part 68.
Your telephone company will probably ask you to disconnect this equipment from the telephone network
until the problem is corrected and you are sure that
the equipment is not malfunctioning. This equipment
may not be used on coin service telephones provided
by your telephone company. Connection to party lines
is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state’s public
utility commission, public service commission or
corporation commission for more information.
A Copyright.qxd 10/28/98 9:50 AM Page 3
This equipment includes automatic dialing capability.
When programming and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers:
■
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the
dispatcher the reason for the call.
■ Perform such activities in off-peak hours, such
as early morning or late evening.
FCC rules prohibit the use of non-hearing aid
compatible telephones in the following locations
or applications:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
All public or semipublic coin-operated or credit
card telephones.
Elevators, highways, tunnels (automobile, subway,
railroad or pedestrian) where a person with
impaired hearing might be isolated in an emergency.
Places where telephones are specifically installed
to alert emergency authorities such as fire, police
or medical assistance personnel.
Hospital rooms, residential health care facilities,
convalescent homes and prisons.
Workstations for the hearing impaired.
Hotel, motel or apartment lobbies.
Stores where telephones are used by patrons
to order merchandise.
Public transportation terminals where telephones
are used to call taxis or to reserve lodging or
rental cars.
In hotel and motel rooms as at least ten percent
of the rooms must contain hearing aid compatible
telephones or jacks for plug-in hearing aid compatible telephones which will be provided to hearing
impaired customers on request.
DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES
Notice to Users of Radios and Television
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements
of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations.
CET appareil numérique de la class B respecte toutes
les exigence du Réglement sur le matérial brouilleur
du Canada.
Notice to Users of the Canadian
Telephone Network
The Canadian Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements.
The Department does not guarantee the equipment
will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
The LifeBook E Series notebook computers are
supplied with an internal modem which complies
with the Industry Canada certification standards for
telecommunication network protection and safety
requirements. Before connecting this equipment to
a telephone line the user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this equipment to the local telecommunication facilities. The user should be aware
that compliance with the certification standards does
not prevent service degradation in some situations.
Repairs to telecommunication equipment should be
made by a Canadian authorized maintenance facility. Any
repairs or alterations not expressly approved by Fujitsu™
PC Corporation or any equipment failures may give the
telecommunication company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment from the telephone line.
The connecting arrangement code for this equipment
is CA11A.
The Load Number is 0.4.
The Load Number assigned to each telephone terminal
device denotes the percentage of the total load to be
connected to a telephone loop or circuit which is used
by the device to prevent overloading. The termination
on a loop may consist of any combination of devices
such that the total of the load numbers of all devices
does not exceed 100.
A Copyright.qxd 10/28/98 9:50 AM Page 4
CAUT ION
For safety, users should ensure that the
electrical ground of the power utility, the
telephone lines and the metallic water
pipes are connected together. Users should
NOT attempt to make such connections
themselves but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority
or electrician. This may be particularly
important in rural areas.
Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Réseau
Téléphonique Canadien
L’étiquette canadienne Industrie Canada identifie
l’équipement certifié. Cette certification signifie
que l’équipement satisfait certaines normes de
protection, d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux
de télécommunications. Le département ne garantit
pas le fonctionnement de l’équipement à la
satisfaction de l’utilisateur.
La série LifeBookTM E possède un modem
interne conforme aux normes de certification
d’Industrie Canada pour protéger les réseaux
de télécommunications et satisfaire aux normes
de sécurité. Avant de connecter cet équipement à une
ligne téléphonique, l’utilisateur doit vérifier s’il est
permis de connecter cet équipement aux installations
de télécommunications locales. L’utilisateur est averti
que même la conformité aux normes de certification
ne peut dans certains cas empêcher la dégradation
du service.
Les réparations de l’équipement de télécommunications
doivent être effectuées par un service de maintenance
agréé au Canada. Toute réparation ou modification, qui
n’est pas expressément approuvée par Fujitsu PC Corp.,
ou toute défaillance de l’équipement peut entraîner
la compagnie de télécommunications à exiger que
l’utilisateur déconnecte l’équipement de la ligne
téléphonique.
Le code d’arrangement de connexion de cet
équipement est CA11A.
Le numéro de charge est 0.4.
Le numéro de charge assigné à chaque terminal
téléphonique indique le pourcentage de la charge
totale pouvant être connecté à une boucle ou à un
circuit téléphonique, utilisé par ce périphérique afin de
prévenir toute surcharge. La terminaison d’une boucle
peut être constituée de n’importe quelle combinaison
de périphériques de sorte que le total de numéros de
charge de tous les périphériques n’excède pas 100.
A Copyright.qxd 10/28/98 9:50 AM Page 5
AVERTISSEMENT
Pour assurer la sécurité, les utilisateurs
doivent vérifier que la prise de terre du
service d’électricité, les lignes télphoniques
et les conduites d’eau métalliques sont
connectées ensemble. Les utilisateurs NE
doivent PAS tenter d’établir ces connexions
eux-mêmes, mais doivent contacter
les services d’inspection d’installations
électriques appropriés ou un électricien.
Ceci peut être particulièrement important
en régions rurales.
UL NOTICE (FOR AUTHORIZED REPAIR TECHNICIANS ONLY)
CAUTION: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only
with the same type and rating fuse.
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if CMOS battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended
by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instruction.
WARNING: CMOS and NiCAD batteries may explode if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.
A Copyright.qxd 10/28/98 9:50 AM Page 7
Black & White
of Cover
(to come)
B TOC.qxd 10/28/98 9:52 AM Page i
Table of Contents
B TOC.qxd 10/28/98 9:52 AM Page ii
T a b l e
PREFACE
o f
C o n t e n t s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
SECTION ONE
SETTING UP YOUR LIFEBOOK
E SERIES FROM FUJITSU
Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overview of LifeBook E Series Features . . . . 4
Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Top and Front Components . . . . . . . . . . 7
Left-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . 8
Right-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear Panel Components. . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bottom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SECTION TWO
STARTING YOUR LIFEBOOK E SERIES
FOR THE FIRST TIME
Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Keyboard Angle . . . . . . .
Starting Your Notebook for the First Time.
ii
.
.
.
.
14
15
15
16
Registering Your LifeBook . . . . . . .
Learning About Your Operating System
and Application Software. . . . . . .
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restarting Your Notebook. . . . . . . .
. . . 22
. . . 24
. . . 24
. . . 25
Power Management . .
Pre-installed Software .
Agate Tioman ProSwap
Phoenix NoteDock . .
Data Security . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SECTION THREE
SECTION FOUR
USING YOUR LIFEBOOK E SERIES
FROM FUJITSU
CONFIGURING YOUR LIFEBOOK
E SERIES FROM FUJITSU
Status Indicator Panel . . .
Integrated Pointing Device
Using the Keyboard . . . .
Volume Control . . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . .
SuperDisk Drive . . . . . .
CD-ROM Drive . . . . . .
DVD Drive . . . . . . . . .
Hard Drive . . . . . . . . .
Internal Modem . . . . . .
Internal LAN. . . . . . . .
Infrared Port . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
32
36
37
38
42
44
44
44
46
47
47
47
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
48
54
59
64
64
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Identifying the Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BIOS Setup Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Navigating Through the Setup Utility . . . . 71
Main Menu – Setting Standard
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Advanced Menu – Setting Device
Feature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Security Menu – Setting the
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Power Menu – Setting Power
Management Feature Controls . . . . . 107
B TOC.qxd 10/28/98 9:52 AM Page iii
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Ta b l e
Boot Menu – Selecting the
Operating System Source . . . . . .
Info Menu – Displaying Basic
System Information . . . . . . . . .
Exit Menu – Leaving the Setup Utility
Setting Up Your Save-To-Disk
File Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 115
. . . 119
. . . 121
. . . 124
o f
External Monitor . . . . . .
Theft Prevention Lock . . .
External Installation of a
Floppy Disk Drive . . . .
Memory Upgrade Module .
LANdock . . . . . . . . . .
Port Replicator . . . . . . .
C o n t e n t s
. . . . . . . . . 139
. . . . . . . . . 139
SECTION SEVEN
.
.
.
.
Caring for Your Notebook . . . . . . . . . . 178
Increasing Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Caring for Your Batteries . . . . . . . . . . 179
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
140
141
144
147
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION FIVE
SECTION SIX
USER INSTALLABLE FEATURES
TROUBLESHOOTING
Multi-function Bay Devices
PC Cards . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Port Devices . . . .
Serial Port Devices . . . . .
USB Devices . . . . . . . .
Microphone . . . . . . . .
Stereo Line In Devices . . .
Headphones . . . . . . . .
Telephone Lines . . . . . .
Ethernet Lines . . . . . . .
Mouse or Keyboard . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
129
135
137
138
138
138
138
138
138
139
139
Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On Self Test Messages . . . . . . .
Emergency CD-ROM/DVD Tray Release .
Modem Setup and Commands . . . . . .
Recovery CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
150
151
170
173
173
174
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LifeBook E Series Specifications.
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Popular Accessories . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
182
182
186
186
APPENDIX B GLOSSARY
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
INDEX
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
iii
B TOC.qxd 10/28/98 9:52 AM Page iv
T a b l e
iv
o f
C o n t e n t s
C Preface.qxd 10/28/98 10:00 AM Page v
P r e f a c e
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C Preface.qxd 10/28/98 10:00 AM Page vi
P r e f a c e
PREFACE
CONVENTIONS USED IN THE GUIDE
The LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu PC
Corporation is a powerful notebook computer.
It is powered by an Intel Pentium II microprocessor, has a built-in color display, a vast array of
possible configurations and brings the computing power of desktop personal computers (PCs)
to a portable environment.
Screen examples in this manual are intended as
examples only, and screen and file names may
differ in actual use.
This manual explains how to operate your
LifeBook E Series’ hardware and built-in
system software. The LifeBook E Series
is compatible with the IBM® PC AT.
It comes with Windows 95, Windows 98,
or Windows NT 4.0 pre-installed.
A LifeBook E Series is a completely selfcontained unit with an active-matrix (TFT)
color LCD display. It has a powerful interface
that enables it to support a variety of optional
features. (Figure P-1.)
vi
Messages displayed by the LifeBook E Series
appear in Courier type.
Example: Shutdown the computer?
Keyboard keys are shown in boldface
Helvetica type.
Example: Fn, F1, Esc, and Ctrl.
Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text.
Example: (See page xx.)
POINT
The point icon highlights information
that will enhance your understanding of
the subject material.
CAUTION
The caution icon highlights information
that is important to your safety, to the
safe operation of your computer, or to
the integrity of your files. Please read all
caution information carefully.
C Preface.qxd 10/28/98 10:00 AM Page vii
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Printer
PCMCIA Card
External Keyboard, Mouse,
or Numeric Keypad
FDD Adapter
Bay 1 Devices
RAM
Bay 2 Devices
Power Adapter
Headphone and Mic
Figure P-1 LifeBook E Series with Both Fujitsu
and Third Party Options
vii
Preface
External Monitor
C Preface.qxd 10/28/98 10:00 AM Page viii
P r e f a c e
viii
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 1
S e c t i o n
Setting Up Your LifeBook E Series
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overview of LifeBook E Series Features . . . . 4
Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Top and Front Components . . . . . . . . . . 7
Left-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . 8
Right-side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bottom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
O n e
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 2
S e c t i o n
O n e
SECTION ONE
■
Modular 24x maximum CD-ROM drive.
(Already installed in Multi-function Bay 2
of your notebook.)
■
Modular 3.5" floppy disk drive (located in the
accessories box). (Figure 1-4.)
■
Battery adapter for Multi-function Bay 2
(located in the accessories box.) (Figure 1-3.)
■
Weight Saver for Multi-function Bay 2
(located in the accessories box.)(Figure 1-5.)
■
RJ-11 cable (located in the accessories box).
■
Getting Started Guide and User’s Guide.
■
Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 or
Windows NT 4.0 Manual.
■
Registration card and customer
information pack.
■
Recovery CD-ROM
(located in the accessories box).
SETTING UP YOUR LIFEBOOK
E SERIES FROM FUJITSU
This section describes how to set up your
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu. We strongly
recommend that you read it before using your
notebook – even if you are already familiar with
notebook computers.
UNPACKING
When you receive your notebook, unpack it
carefully, and compare the parts you have
received with the items listed below and with
your packing label.
For a standard configuration you should have:
(Your configuration may be different.)
■
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu.
(Figure 1-1.)
■
AC adapter with AC power cord (located in
the accessories box). (Figure 1-2.)
■
Modular Lithium ion battery. (Already
installed in Multi-function Bay 1 of
your notebook.)
2
Figure 1-1 LifeBook E Series Notebook
Figure 1-2 AC Adapter Unit
POINT
You may have different options than
those listed if you have a built-to-order
LifeBook E Series.
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 3
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Your LifeBook may have other optional devices
depending on your built-to-order specifications.
Please take a moment now to locate your packing slip and circle or enter the options that
apply to your LifeBook specifications in the
space to the right.
Figure 1-3 Battery Adapter for Multi-function Bay 2
Once you have checked and confirmed that
your notebook system is complete, read
through the component identification section
and learn about the features of your LifeBook.
Figure 1-4 Floppy Disk Drive
Figure 1-5 Weight Saver
(for Multi-function Bay 2 only)
Date Purchased: ________________________
Model Number: ________________________
CPU: @ 233Mhz @ 266Mhz @ 300Mhz
LCD: @ XGA (1024x768) @ SVGA (800x600)
SDRAM: @ 32MB @ 64MB @ 96MB @ 160MB*
HDD: @ 3.2GB @ 4.0GB @ 5.0GB @ 6.4GB
Communications Port:
@ V.90 Modem @ Fast Ethernet Module
@ None
Multi-function Bay Devices:
FPCFDD05
@ Floppy Disk Drive
FPCLS02
@ SuperDisk™ 120
@ Iomega Zip 100 Drive FPCZIP03
FPCCD09
@ CD-ROM Drive
FPCDVD04
@ DVD Drive
FPCBP14
@ Lithium ion Battery
@ Secondary Hard Drive FPCHDD17
FPCBB01
@ Weight Saver
FPCFDA03
@ Floppy Disk Drive
Adapter for external
FDD connection
Integrated Pointing Devices:
@ ErgoTrac™ Pointing Device
@ Touchpad Pointing Device
*Availability depends on Qual of 128MB DIMMS
3
One
S e t t i n g U p Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 4
S e c t i o n
O n e
OVERVIEW OF LIFEBOOK E SERIES
FEATURES AND OPTIONS
The LifeBook E Series is a compact, yet powerful
notebook computer available with standard features including: (See Appendix A, pages 182-186,
and your packing label for detailed information
on individual models and Built-to-order options.)
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
4
233MHz, 266MHz or 300Mhz Intel
Pentium II processor.
32MB SDRAM on-board, expandable
to 160MB via expansion slot.
12.1" or 13.3" active-matrix (TFT) color
display with 800 x 600 or
1024 x 768 resolution.
2MB on-board video RAM.
DMI 2.0 compliant.
Built-in 3.2GB, 4.0GB or 5.0GB hard drive.
Multi-function Bays which support
the following optional features:
■ Lithium ion battery
(one included with all models).
■ 3.5" floppy disk drive (for Bay 1 only).
■ 24x maximum CD-ROM drive
(for Bay 2 only).
Optional SuperDisk™ 120 (for Bay 1 only).
■ Optional 1.5-speed maximum DVD-ROM
drive (for Bay 2 only).
■ Optional Second hard drive (for Bay 2 only).
■ Optional Iomega Zip 100 drive
(for Bay 2 only).
■ Optional Second Lithium ion battery
(for Bay 1 and Bay 2 with adapter).
■ Optional Floppy Disk Drive Adapter
for external FDD connection.
■ Weight Saver (for Bay 2 only).
Depending on your specific model number
or your Built-to-order options you may have
one of the following:
■ Internal V.90 56K fax/data/voice modem with
built-in telephony support.
■
CAUTION
The internal modem is designed to
the ITU-T V.90 standard. Its maximum
speed is 56000bps at download theoretically and its actual connection rate
depends on the line conditions. The
maximum speed is 33600bps at upload.
CAUTION
The internal modem is not intended for
use with Digital PBX systems. Do not
connect the internal modem to a digital
PBX as it may cause serious damage to
the internal modem or your entire notebook. Consult your PBX manufacturer’s
documentation for details. Some hotels
have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find
out BEFORE you connect your modem.
CAUTION
The internal modems on all Fujitsu
notebooks from Fujitsu PC Corporation
are not qualified for use with telephone
systems outside the United States and
Canada and may not operate in other
countries.
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 5
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Internal Fast Ethernet (10/100 Base-T/Tx) network interface card with RJ-45 connector.
No Modem or LAN.
Full audio and video features:
16-bit SoundBlaster-compatible sound chip.
3D-Stereo for multiple speaker effect.
Zoomed Video support for full motion video
acceleration. (With Windows 95 and
Windows 98 only.)
Built-in stereo speakers.
Built-in mono microphone.
Stereo line in jack.
Stereo headphone jack.
Microphone jack.
Two Type II/one Type III PC Card slot.
Fast IrDA (4Mbps) compatible infrared port
for wireless data transfer. (With Windows 95
and Windows 98 only.)
Integrated ErgoTrac™ or Touchpad pointing
device for customized comfort and
cursor control.
External monitor support with simultaneous
display capabilities.
Full-size keyboard with three dedicated
Windows keys.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Hot swap connection for an external
keyboard or an external mouse.
USB device support. (With Windows 95
and Windows 98 only.)
Bridge battery for warm-swapping
capabilities for batteries.
Standard pre-installed software:
(Pre-installed software will vary depending
on your specific model number or your
Built-to-order specifications.)
Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 or
Windows NT 4.0 operating system.
LapLink for file transfer via modem, cable or
infrared port. (With Windows 95 and
Windows 98 only.)
PMSet 98 (Windows 98) or PowerPanel
(Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 95) for
system power management.
Agate Tioman HotSwap for hot-swapping
functionality in Multi-function bays (with
Windows 95 and Windows 98 only).
NoteDock for hot-docking/undocking
support and hot-swapping functionality
in the Multi-function bays (with Windows
NT 4.0 only).
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Card Executive for PCMCIA card support
(with Windows NT 4.0 only).
PC-Doctor for system diagnostics.
NAI McAfee VirusScan for virus protection.
ESS AudioRack for 3D-Stereo, audio CD and
other audio controls (with Windows 95 and
Windows 98 only).
Standard user-install software:
AT&T WorldNet Service (with Windows 95
and Windows 98 only).
AOL (Windows 95 and Windows 98 only).
Netscape Communicator.
Internet Explorer (with Windows 95 and
Windows NT 4.0 only). (Note: Explore
comes intergrated in Windows 98).
POINT
McAfee VirusScan, PC-Doctor and
Netscape Communicator are available on
all three operating systems (Windows 95,
Windows 98 and Windows NT 4.0).
5
One
S e t t i n g U p Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 6
S e c t i o n
O n e
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION
For detailed specifications on each model refer
to Appendix A on pages 182–186.
Display Panel Latch
Display Panel
Status Indicator Panel
Built-in Microphone
Keyboard
Brightness Control
TM
ErgoTrac pointing device
Suspend/Resume Button
Closed Cover Switch
Multi-function Bay 1
Multi-function Bay 2
6
Figure 1-6 LifeBook E Series with Display Open
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 7
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
S e t t i n g U p Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Display Panel Latch
This latch locks and releases the display panel.
When the display panel is released it pops up
slightly to make it easier to open. (Figure 1-6.)
Display Panel
This is a color LCD panel with back lighting for
the display of text and graphics. (Figure 1-6.)
Brightness Control
The brightness control adjusts the overall
intensity of the display panel back lighting.
(Figure 1-6.)
Built-in Microphone
The built-in microphone allows mono audio
input to your notebook. (Figure 1-6.)
Status Indicator Panel
An LCD display of the status of the power state
and source, Suspend mode, battery charge (battery in either Multi-function Bay), floppy disk
drive activity, hard drive or zip drive activity,
CD-ROM drive activity, PC Card activity,
CapsLock, NumLk and Scr Lk. (Figure 1-6.)
Stereo Speakers
The built-in dual speakers output stereo sound
from the notebook. (Figure 1-6)
Suspend/Resume Button
The Suspend/Resume button allows you to suspend notebook activity without turning off the
notebook power, and to return it to an active
state. This feature saves power, and is particularly useful when the notebook is running only
on battery power. (See pages 48-53 and 107-112
for more information on power management.)
(Figure 1-6.)
Closed Cover Switch
The closed cover switch turns off the LCD back
lighting when the display panel is closed, thus
saving power. This switch also behaves as a
Suspend/Resume button, when the closed
cover switch is set to Suspend/Resume in the
BIOS Setup Utility. (see pages 95-102 for more
information on the BIOS Setup Utility)
(Figure 1-6.)
CAUTION
One
TOP AND FRONT COMPONENTS
Be sure you know which settings are
active for your Suspend/Resume button
before you use it. Misuse can result in
data loss. (See the Power Savings Menu
of the BIOS setup utility, pages 107-112,
for more information.)
Keyboard
A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows
keys for input into the notebook.
(Figure 1-6.)
Pointing Device
The pointing device is a mouse-like cursor
control system with two click buttons.
(Figure 1-6.)
7
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 8
S e c t i o n
O n e
Multi-function Bay One
This bay accommodates the following optional
and standard devices:
■
Lithium ion battery.
■
Optional SuperDisk 120
■
3.5" floppy disk drive.
Multi-function Bay Two
This bay accommodates the following optional
and standard devices:
■
24x maximum CD-ROM drive.
■
Optional 1.5-speed maximum
DVD-ROM drive.
■
Lithium ion battery mounted in the
Battery adapter for Multi-function Bay 2
(a second battery can be purchased separately for a dual battery configuration).
■
Optional 5.0 GB Second hard drive.
■
Optional Iomega Zip 100 Drive.
■
Weight Saver.
8
POINT
The Weight Saver option for Multi-function Bay 2 is meant to fill the bay when
no other device is installed. It is not recommended that you use your LifeBook
with no device in either of the Multifunction Bays.
PC Card Eject Buttons
PC Card Lock
PC Card Slots
External FDD
connector
Communications port
Figure 1-7 LifeBook E Series Left-side Panel
LEFT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS
PC Card Slot
The PC Card Slot allows you to install two Type
I or Type II PC Cards or one Type III PC Card.
(See pages 135-137 for more information on PC
Cards.) The button to the left of the card slot
locks the card(s) in place, and the buttons
to the right of the slot eject the card(s) from
the slot. (Figure 1-7.)
Communications Port
The communications port may be configured
with either an RJ-11 telephone jack for an
internal 56K modem or an RJ-45 jack for an
internal Fast Ethernet (10/100 Base-T/Tx) port.
Check your packing sheet to see which option
(if any) you have on your LifeBook.
(Figure 1-7.)
External Floppy Disk Drive Port
A port for attaching an optional external floppy
disk drive with adapter. This allows you to connect an optional floppy disk drive when the
Multi-function bays are being used for other
purposes. (Figure 1-7.)
POINT
Your LifeBook may be configured with
no device in the Communications port
if you specified as such in your built-toorder options.
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:03 AM Page 9
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
RIGHT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS
Theft Prevention Lock Slot
This is a slot that allows you to attach
a physical lock down device. (Figure 1-8.)
POINT
Windows NT 4.0 does not support USB
devices at this time.
Stereo Line
In Jack
Headphone Jack
Microphone
Jack
Theft Prevention
Lock Slot
Power Switch
DC Power Jack
The DC power jack allows you to plug in the
AC adapter or the optional auto/airline adapter.
(Figure 1-8.)
Power Switch
This switch is the main power switch for your
notebook. (Figure 1-8.)
USB Port
This port allows you to connect Universal
Serial Bus devices, such as external game pads,
pointing devices, keyboards and speakers.
(Figure 1-8.)
Microphone Jack
The microphone jack allows you to connect an
external mono microphone. (Figure 1-8.)
Volume
Control
USB
Port
Fan
DC Power Jack
Figure 1-8 LifeBook E Series Right-side Panel
CAUTION
FAN: Do not block the circulation
of air flow.
Stereo Line In Jack
The stereo line in jack allows you to connect an
external audio source to your notebook, like an
audio cassette player. This jack will not support
an external microphone. (Figure 1-8.)
Headphone Jack
You can connect headphones or powered
external speakers to the headphone jack.
(Figure 1-8.)
Volume Control
The volume control is a knob which provides
manual control of the sound level of all audio
output from your notebook. (Figure 1-8.)
CAUTION
There are also software volume controls.
The knob setting and the software
settings will interact. Software volume
off will override the knob setting and
the software volume setting will control
the maximum knob setting. (See Volume
Control on page 37 for more information.)
9
One
S e t t i n g U p Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:04 AM Page 10
S e c t i o n
O n e
PS/2 Port
Docking Port
External
Monitor Port
Serial Port
Parallel Port
Slide Panel
Docking Port
This port is for connection to an optional port
replicator or docking station. The connector
cover must be closed and the sliding panel fully
opened to reveal the docking port and the
PS/2 port when connecting a port replicator
or a docking station. (Figure 1-9.)
CAUTION
Connector Cover
Infrared Port
The cover – which closes over the ports
on the rear of the notebook – can be
damaged if it is left open when the
notebook is moved around.
Figure 1-9 LifeBook E Series Rear Panel
REAR PANEL COMPONENTS
PS/2 Port
The port allows you to connect an external PS/2
keyboard, mouse, or numeric keypad.
(Figure 1-9.)
10
POINT
Windows NT 4.0 does not support
infrared communications.
Serial Port
The serial port allows you to connect serial
RS-232C devices, such as serial printers or
serial scanners. (This is also sometimes
referred to as a COM port.) (Figure 1-9.)
Parallel Port
The parallel port allows you to connect
parallel devices, such as a parallel printer
to your notebook. (This is also sometimes
referred to as a LPT port.) (Figure 1-9.)
External Monitor Port
This port allows you to connect an external
VGA or SVGA monitor. (Figure 1-9.)
Infrared Port
The fast IrDA 1.1 (4Mbps) compatible port
allows you to communicate with another IrDA
compatible infrared device without a cable.
(See page 47 for more information.)
(Figure 1-9.)
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:04 AM Page 11
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
BOTTOM COMPONENTS
Tilt Adjustment Feet
These are a pair of feet which flip down and
hold the back of the notebook approximately
6° higher than the front when resting on a flat
surface. They are designed to make using your
notebook keyboard more comfortable.
(Figure 1-10.)
Main Unit and Configuration Label
This label shows the model number and other
information about your notebook. In addition
the configuration portion of the label has the
serial number and manufacturer information
that you will need to give your support representative so that he or she can help you. It identifies the exact version of various components
of your notebook. (Figure 1-10.)
Memory Upgrade Compartment
This compartment houses the memory upgrade
module which allows you to expand the system
memory capacity of your notebook. (See pages
141-144 for more information on installing
added memory capacity.) (Figure 1-10.)
Multi-function Bay 1 Release Button
This is the release to allow removal and
installation of devices in Multi-function Bay 1.
(Figure 1-10.)
Multi-function Bay 1
This compartment is accessed from the front of
your notebook. (See Figure 1-6 on page 6.)
Multi-function Bay 2 Release Button
This is the release to allow removal and
installation of devices in Multi-function Bay 2.
(Figure 1-10.)
Multi-function Bay 2
This compartment is accessed from the front of
your notebook. (See Figure 1-6 on page 6.)
Hard Drive Compartment
This compartment houses the primary
hard drive. (See Figure 1-10.)
Tilt
Adjustment
Feet
Memory
Upgrade
Compartment
HDD
Compartment
Main Unit
Label
Multi-function Bay 2
Release Button
Multi-function Bay 1
Release Button
Figure 1-10 LifeBook E Series Bottom
11
One
S e t t i n g U p Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
D One SettingUp.qxd 10/28/98 10:04 AM Page 12
S e c t i o n
12
O n e
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:07 AM Page 13
S e c t i o n
Starting Your LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adjusting the Keyboard Angle . . . . . . . . 15
Starting Your Notebook
for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Registering Your LifeBook . . . . . . . . . . 22
Learning About Your Operating System
and Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Restarting Your Notebook . . . . . . . . . . 25
T w o
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:07 AM Page 14
S e c t i o n
T w o
SECTION TWO
To Switch From AC Adapter Power
To Battery Power
STARTING YOUR LIFEBOOK
E SERIES FROM FUJITSU
1. Be sure that you have at least one charged
battery installed.
This section describes the processes of starting
your LifeBook for the first time, initial software
setup and registration.
2. Remove the AC or auto/airline adapter.
CAUTION
POWER SOURCES
Your notebook has four possible power sources:
the primary Lithium ion battery; an optional
dual Lithium ion battery configuration; the AC
adapter; or an optional auto/airline adapter.
Connecting the Power Adapters
The AC adapter or an optional auto/airline
adapter provides power for operating your
notebook and charging the batteries.
(Figure 2-1.)
To Connect the AC Adapter
1.
Plug the DC Output cable of the AC
adapter into the DC Power jack on the
right-side panel of your notebook.
2.
Plug the AC adapter into an AC
electrical outlet.
14
Figure 2-1 Connecting the AC Adapter
To Connect the Optional Auto/airline Adapter
1.
Plug the DC Output cable into the DC
Power jack on the right-side panel of
your notebook.
2.
Plug the auto/airline adapter plug into the
cigarette lighter of a car or other vehicle
with the ignition key in the On or the
Accessories position or into the DC
Power jack on an airplane seat.
The primary Lithium ion battery is not
charged when you purchase your notebook. Initially you will need to connect the
AC adapter or the auto/airline adapter to
use it. If you purchase a second Lithium
ion battery it will not be charged when
you get it. You will need to charge it prior
to use. It can take up to three (3) hours to
charge a single battery if your notebook
is turned off or is in Suspend mode. If
your notebook is in use it can take up
to nine (9) hours or more to charge a
single battery.
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 15
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
DISPLAY PANEL
ADJUSTING THE KEYBOARD ANGLE
Opening the Display Panel
Lifting the latch releases the top of the display
panel from the front of the notebook body.
When the display panel is released it pops up
slightly to make it easier to open. Lift the display panel backward until the screen is at a
comfortable viewing angle. (Figure 2-2.)
On the bottom of your notebook, near the
back, are a pair of feet which flip down and
hold the back of the notebook about 6° higher
than the front when resting on a flat surface.
They are designed to make it more comfortable
to use the keyboard with your notebook. The
feet must be folded flat against the bottom
of the notebook when opening or using the
CD-ROM drive or it will not open or
operate properly.
Adjusting the Display Panel
Before you turn on your notebook, you may
want to adjust the brightness level of the screen.
Start with the brightness control slider (located
directly under the display screen) in the middle
position. (Figure 2-3.)
Figure 2-3 Adjusting the Display
You may need to adjust the brightness levels
after you start your notebook and periodically
for different operating environments.
POINT
The higher the brightness level, the more
power the notebook will consume and
the faster your batteries will discharge.
For maximum battery life, make sure that
the brightness is set as low as possible.
CAUTION
Do not operate your CD-ROM drive
or attempt to open the tray unless your
notebook is sitting on a flat surface and
the adjustment feet are folded against
the bottom of the notebook. Using a
CD-ROM drive when it is not level
may damage the drive or prevent
proper operation.
Figure 2-2 Opening the Display Panel
15
Two
Starting
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 16
S e c t i o n
T w o
STARTING YOUR NOTEBOOK
FOR THE FIRST TIME
CAUTION
Power On
The power switch is located on the right side of
your notebook. This switch is used to turn On
the computer from its Off state. Once you have
connected your AC adapter or have charged the
internal Lithium ion Battery, you can power On
your notebook.
CAUTION
The main Lithium ion battery is not
charged when you purchase your notebook. Initially you will need to connect
the AC adapter to use it. If you purchase
an optional second Lithium ion battery, it
will not be charged when you get it, you
will need to charge it prior to use.
Facing the keyboard and display panel, move the
power switch towards the rear of your notebook.
This is the On position. (See Figure 2-4.) When
you are done working you can leave your note16
When you turn on your notebook be
sure you have a power source. This
means that at least one battery is
installed and charged, or that the AC
adapter or the auto/airline adapter is
connected and has power.
Figure 2-4 Power On
book in Suspend mode, (see page 49), or you can
turn it off. The power switch moved toward the
front of your notebook is in the Off position.
(See the section Power Off, pages 24-25, for the
recommended shutoff procedures.)
CAUTION
Do not carry your notebook around
with the power on or subject it to shocks
or vibration, as you risk damaging
your notebook.
When the power switch is turned on, your
notebook carries out a Power On Self Test
(POST) to check the internal parts and configuration. If a fault is found a beep will sound
and/or an error message will be displayed.
(See Troubleshooting on pages 170-172) Depending on the nature of the problem you may be
able to continue by starting the operating
system or by entering the BIOS setup utility
and revising the settings.
After satisfactory completion of the Power On
Self Test (POST) your notebook will load your
operating system. (See Boot Menu on pages 115116 to see which kind of disk will be the source.)
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 17
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
CAUTION
Never turn off your notebook during
Power On Self Test (POST) or it will
cause an error message to be displayed
when you turn your notebook on the
next time. (See the Troubleshooting
information on pages 170-172.)
Booting the System with Windows 95
We strongly recommend that you not attach
any other external devices and do not put any
CD or floppy disk in your drives until you have
gone through the initial power on sequence.
When you turn on your notebook for the first
time it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen.
If you do nothing the system will read the hard
drive for the operating system software, flash
the notebook configuration information on the
screen, and load the Windows 95 Setup Wizard.
You will then be stepped through the condition
of use process. You must complete this initial
process before you will be able to use your
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
notebook. (If you wish to access the BIOS setup
utility before you go through the condition of
use process you must press the F2 key while the
Fujitsu logo is still visible. If you press the Esc
key while the Fujitsu logo is still present you
will get a dialog box which will allow you to
select which drive is to be used for finding the
operating system.) If you turn off the power
without using the on screen Cancel button
you will get an error message when you start
your notebook again.
Condition of Use Process
The first time you start your notebook you
must confirm your acceptance of the copyright
limitations for your pre-installed software. After
you complete the Condition of Use process
these screens will not appear again. There are 6
screens to read carefully and respond to.
You cannot use your notebook until this
Condition of Use process is completed. The
bottom of each screen has a <Back button, a
Next> Button and a Cancel button which
are activated by the integrated ErgoTrac or
TouchPad cursor control and button click. The
<Back button will return you to the previous
screen. The Next> button activates any
choices or information you have entered and
takes you on to the next screen. The Cancel
button allows you to stop the setup process.
If you stop the process your notebook will
start up at the beginning of the Windows 95
Setup Wizard.
The screens you will be required to respond to
are described with the required action.
User Information
Fill in your name and your company name as
you want the software licensed. To step from the
name blank to the company blank press the Tab
key. When the information has been entered click
on the Next> button. You will not be allowed
to continue until you make an entry.
License Agreement
Read the agreement carefully. You can scroll
through the text using the integrated ErgoTrac
or TouchPad pointing device to activate the
17
Two
Starting
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 18
S e c t i o n
T w o
scroll bar or use the up arrow Õ and down
arrow Ô keys to move up and down the text
one line at a time, or use the Page Up and Page
Down keys to move the text one screen at a
time. When you finish reading you must
point and click to accept or reject the terms
of the agreement and then click on the
Next> button.
POINT
If you reject the terms of the license
agreement you will be asked to review
the license agreement for information on
returning Windows 95 or to shut down
your notebook.
Certificate of Authenticity
Look in the box that your notebook came in
and you will find a Windows 95 Certificate of
Authenticity shrink wrapped with the Windows
95 Users manual. On the certificate you will
find a bar-code with a number above it. This is
your product code and the number you should
18
enter on the Certificate of Authenticity screen.
When you have entered the number exactly as
shown then click on the Next> button.
Start Wizard
The Start Wizard screen will appear if you have
entered a valid product code. When you click
on the Finish button the display will flash
various screens as the system identifies what
hardware is installed.
Time Zone
When your notebook has completely identified
all of the installed hardware it will display a
dialog box for entering which time zone you
wish to set the clock to.
Printer Setup
When the messaging setup is complete a dialog
box will appear for selecting which printer is to
be attached to your notebook. You do not have
to select a printer at this time. If you do not
wish to select a printer, click on the Cancel
button. If you do wish to select a printer click
on the Next button and answer the questions.
Windows 95 Setup
Once you have completed the printer setup, or
if you have chosen not to set up a printer at this
time, you will see the Windows 95 Setup screen.
This screen lets you set up Internet Explorer
4.01 with Active Desktop on your Lifebook.
Follow the on-screen direction to complete
installation of IE 4.01
POINT
If you would like to skip the installation
of Internet Explorer 4.01, go to the Start
Menu on the desktop, select Shutdown
and Restart the computer. After returning
to Windows, you can install Internet
Explorer 4.01 at any time by selecting
the icon Setup for Internet Explorer 4.01
in the Internet Starts Here folder on
the desktop.
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 19
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Booting the System with Windows 98
We strongly recommend that you not attach
any other external devices and do not put any
CD or floppy disk in your drives until you have
gone through the initial power on sequence.
When you turn on your notebook for the first
time it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen.
If you do nothing the system will read the hard
drive for the operating system software, flash
the notebook configuration information on the
screen, and then the Windows 98 Setup Wizard
Screen will appear. You will then be stepped
through the condition of use process. You must
complete this initial process before you will be
able to use your notebook. (If you wish to
access the BIOS setup utility before you go
through the condition of use process you must
press the F2 key while the Fujitsu logo is still
visible. If you press the Esc key while the
Fujitsu logo is still present you will get a dialog
box which will allow you to select which drive
is to be used for finding the operating system.)
If you turn off the power without using the on
screen Cancel button you will get an error
message when you start your notebook again.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
Condition of Use Process
The first time you start your notebook you
must confirm your acceptance of the copyright
limitations for your pre-installed software. After
you complete the Condition of Use process
these screens will not appear again. There are
6 screens to read carefully and respond to.
User Information
Fill in your name and your company name as
you want the software licensed. To step from the
name blank to the company blank press the Tab
key. When the information has been entered click
on the Next> button. You will not be allowed
to continue until you make an entry.
You cannot use your notebook until this
Condition of Use process is completed. The bottom of each screen has a <Back button, a
Next> Button and a Cancel button which
are activated by the integrated ErgoTrac or
TouchPad cursor control and button click. The
<Back button will return you to the previous
screen. The Next> button activates any choices or information you have entered and takes
you on to the next screen. The Cancel button allows you to stop the setup process.
License Agreement
Read the agreement carefully. You can scroll
through the text using the integrated ErgoTrac
or TouchPad pointing device to activate the
scroll bar or use the up arrow Õ and down
arrow Ô keys to move up and down the text
one line at a time, or use the Page Up and Page
Down keys to move the text one screen at a
time. When you finish reading you must
point and click to accept or reject the terms
of the agreement and then click on the
Next> button.
If you stop the process your notebook will
start up at the beginning of the Windows 98
Setup Wizard.
The screens you will be required to respond to
are described with the required action.
19
Two
Starting
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 20
S e c t i o n
T w o
POINT
If you reject the terms of the license
agreement you will be asked to review
the license agreement for information on
returning Windows 98 or to shut down
your notebook.
Product Key
Look in the box that your notebook came in
and you will find a Windows 98 Certificate of
Authenticity shrink wrapped with the Windows
98 Users manual. On the certificate you will
find a bar-code with a number above it. This is
your product key and the number you should
enter on the Product Key screen. When you
have entered the number exactly as shown then
click on the Next> button.
Start Wizard
The Start Wizard screen will appear if you have
entered a valid product key. When you click on
the Finish button the display will flash various
screens as the system identifies what hardware
is installed.
20
Time Zone
When your notebook has completely identified
all of the installed hardware it will display a
dialog box for entering which time zone you
wish to set the clock to.
Booting the System with Windows NT 4.0
We strongly recommend that you not attach
any other external devices and do not put any
CD or floppy disk in your drives until you have
gone through the initial power on sequence.
Printer Setup
When the time zone setup is complete a dialog
box will appear for selecting which printer is to
be attached to your notebook. You do not have
to select a printer at this time. If you do not
wish to select a printer, click on the Cancel
button. If you do wish to select a printer click
on the Next button and answer the questions.
When you turn on your notebook for the first
time it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen.
If you do nothing the system will read the hard
drive for the operating system software, flash
the notebook configuration information on the
screen, and then the Windows NT 4.0 Setup
Wizard Screen will appear. You will then be
stepped through the condition of use process.
You must complete this initial process before
you will be able to use your notebook. (If you
wish to access the BIOS setup utility before you
go through the condition of use process you
must press the F2 key while the Fujitsu logo is
still visible. If you press the Esc key while the
Fujitsu logo is still present you will get a dialog
box which will allow you to select which drive is
to be used for finding the operating system.) If
you turn off the power without using the on
screen Cancel button you will get an error
message when you start your notebook again.
Welcome to Windows 98
When you boot into Windows 98 for the first
time you will see a Welcome to Windows 98
dialog box with several options. Select the first
option, Register Now, to register your LifeBook
E Series notebook. (See page 21 in this section
for details on registering your notebook in
Windows 98.)
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 21
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
If you reject the terms of the license
agreement you will be asked to review
the license agreement for information on
returning Windows NT Workstation or to
shut down your notebook
Windows NT Setup
The Windows NT Setup screen appears after
you accept the license agreement. This setup
wizard will guide you through the setup of your
Windows NT Workstation.
Name and Organization
Fill in your name and the company name as
you want the software licensed. To step from
the name blank to the company blank press the
Tab key. When the information has been entered
click on the Next> button. You will not be
allowed to continue until you make an entry.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
Registration
Look in the box that your notebook came in
and you will find a Windows NT Workstation
Certificate of Authenticity shrink wrapped with
the Windows NT Workstation Users manual.
On the certificate you will find a bar-code with
a number above it. This is your product ID and
the number you should enter on the
Registration screen. When you have entered the
number exactly as shown then click on the
Next> button.
Computer Name
You need to enter a name for your computer to
be identified by on the network. This must be a
unique name and must be 15 characters or less.
Enter a name for your computer to be identified by and click on the Next> button.
Administrator Account
This screen lets you setup a password for the
Administrator account on your notebook. The
administrator account has authority over all
user accounts. You must not forget this password. If you do not wish to have password protection on your administrator account you can
leave this screen blank. When you have entered
and confirmed your password click on the
Next> button.
Windows NT Setup
Once you have setup your computer name and
your administrator account you can click on
the Next> button to finish the Windows NT
Workstation setup and begin installing
Windows NT networking. This will take your
notebook a few seconds and you will need to
reboot the system when it is complete.
21
Two
Starting
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 22
S e c t i o n
T w o
POINT
You will find a Recovery CD-ROM packet
in your accessories box. Please store the
packet in a safe place in case there is a
loss of data, and it becomes necessary
to re-install your operating system and/
or application programs. (See Restoring
Your Pre-installed Software from the
Recovery CD-ROM on pages 174-176.)
REGISTERING YOUR LIFEBOOK
What are the benefits of registering?
You will receive an identification label for your
LifeBook, which, if your LifeBook is ever lost,
may help in getting it returned to you. You also
receive priority Personal Identification Number
(PIN) technical support access and useful product mailings. Proof of purchase is not required
if you register within 30 days of your purchase.
22
How do I register?
For Windows 95 and Windows NT, you can
register your system by modem by clicking on
the Fujitsu Welcome Center icon on your
desktop. Complete the electronic form and
click on the “send registration” button. Your
registration information will be transmitted via
phone lines to the Fujitsu Registration Center
and you will receive registration confirmation
in one week to 10 days.
For Windows 98, you can access the Softbank
E-Registration program by selecting the
Register Now option in the Welcome to
Windows 98 wizard menu. This menu appears
the first time you start Windows 98 after completing the Condition of Use process. To access
the Welcome to Windows 98 wizard anytime,
double-click on the Welcome to Windows 98
icon on your desktop.
POINT
Make sure you have connected a
phone line to your modem or Ethernet
Network to your Ethernet port before
you use E-Registration.
You may also print your completed registration
form and fax it to
1-949-450-9140 or mail it to:
Fujitsu PC Corporation
15355 Barranca Pkwy, Irvine, CA 92618-9520
Alternately you may call:
1-800-8fujitsu (1-800-838-5487)
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 23
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
You can register your LifeBook E Series
notebook with any operating system via
mail, telephone or fax.
POINT
Please consult your User’s Guide for
specific information about the internal
modem and electronic registration for
the LifeBook E Series. Consult Microsoft
on-line documentation for specific information about the Windows Desktop and
Control Panel programs.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
After Registering Your LifeBook E Series
in Windows 98
If you do not have an existing internet connection or account and you would like to have
Windows 98 retrieve a list of Internet Service
Providers for you, please do the following:
9. Click ‘Ok’ to close the Network program
(you may close the ‘Control Panel’ folder
too if you’d like) and Windows will begin
copying files.
1. Open the ‘My Computer’ folder on the
Windows Desktop.
11. The ‘Enter Windows Password’ screen will
pop up. Enter a ‘User Name’ and ‘Password’
to continue.
2. Open the ‘Control Panel’ folder.
3. Open the ‘Network’ program.
4. You will see the following message:
“Your network is not complete. Do you
want to continue?”
5. Select ‘Yes’.
6. Click the ‘Add’ button.
7. Select ‘Client’ for the type of network
component you want to install.
8. Select ‘Microsoft’, choose the default setting
‘Client for Microsoft Networks’ and click ‘Ok’.
10. When Windows prompts you to restart the
computer, click the ‘Yes’ button.
12. After the Windows 98 Desktop appears, connect a standard phone line to your modem.
13. Open the ‘Connect to the Internet’ program
on the Desktop.
14. Select the first option ‘I want to sign up...’
and click ‘Next’
15. Windows 98 will dial a 1 (800) phone number to connect to the internet and provide
you a list of Internet Service Providers.
Follow the on-screen directions to continue.
23
Two
Starting
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 24
S e c t i o n
T w o
LEARNING ABOUT YOUR OPERATING
SYSTEM AND APPLICATION SOFTWARE
Tutorials
All operating systems and most application
software have tutorials built-in. We highly recommend that you step through your tutorial
before you use an application even if you are
familiar with the same application on a different machine, an earlier version of the application, or a similar product.
Manuals
In the accessories box you will find manuals for
your installed operating system and other
pre-installed software.
Software manuals of pre-installed software
that are not in the accessories box are available
online. See the help screens of your preinstalled software. We recommend that you
review these manuals for general information
on the use of these applications and to get a
basic understanding of what is covered in the
manual, and how it is organized, should
questions arise as you use the applications.
24
Links to Fujitsu On-line
You can go directly to the on-line Fujitsu
Accessories catalog for your notebook by clicking on the LifeBook Accessories Website URL
link in the Windows Start menu. This will take
you to the Web site for Fujitsu Lifebook accessories. You can also reach Fujitsu Service and
Support on-line by clicking on the Fujitsu
Service and Support Website URL link in the
Service and Support Software folder in the
Windows Start menu.
POINT
You must have an active internet
connection to use the on-line URL links
described in the Links to Fujitsu On-line.
POWER OFF
Before turning off the power by putting the
power switch in the Off position, check that the
Hard Drive, CD-ROM, PC Card and the Floppy
Disk Drive Access indicators are all Off. (See
Figure 2-4, page 16.) If you turn off the power
while accessing a disk or PC Card there is a risk
of loss of data. The Off position is reached by
facing the keyboard and display panel, and
moving the switch toward the front of your
notebook. To assure that your notebook shuts
down without error, use the Windows shut
down procedure.
CAUTION
Never turn your notebook off while an
application is running. Be sure to close all
files, exit all applications and shut down
your operating system prior to turning off
the power with the power switch. If files
are open when you turn the power off,
you will lose any changes that have not
been saved, and may cause disk errors.
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 25
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Shutting down your notebook from Windows
lets your notebook shut down operations, and
turn off the power in the proper sequence to
prevent errors. The sequence is:
1. Go to the Start button menu.
2. Click on Shut Down.
3. Verify that Shut Down
is selected and click on Yes.
If you are going to store your notebook for a
month or more, take the following precautions:
1. Remove any CD and/or floppy disk.
2. After shutting down from Windows turn off
your notebook using the power switch.
3. Close your notebook display panel.
4. Disconnect the AC adapter.
5. Remove the batteries and store them
separately in a cool dry place.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
POINT
When your notebook has been shut
down from Windows, it is not the same
as being turned off from the power
switch. It is in a pseudo-off state, with all
applications closed, but can and must be
turned on by pressing the Suspend/
Resume button. It is drawing some
current in the pseudo-off state.
POINT
You may also select Shut Down and
once the power is off for 10 seconds or
more you can restart your notebook with
the Suspend/Resume button, or once the
power is off, turn the power switch to
Off for 10 seconds and then switch it
to On. These alternative methods are
not recommended.
Two
Starting
RESTARTING THE SYSTEM
When you wish to restart your system be
sure that you follow the proper procedure.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Go to the Start button menu.
2. Click on Shut Down.
3. Click on Restart
CAUTION
Turning off the power switch without
exiting Windows may cause an error
when you start the next time. Turning
the power to On when it has been Off
for less than 10 seconds may also cause
an error when you start the next time.
4. Verify that Restart
is selected and click on Yes.
Windows will shut down and restart
your notebook.
25
E Two Starting.qxd 10/28/98 10:08 AM Page 26
S e c t i o n
26
T w o
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 27
S e c t i o n
Using Your LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Status Indicator Panel. . .
Integrated Pointing Device
Using the Keyboard. . . .
Volume Control. . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . .
SuperDisk Drive. . . . . .
CD-ROM Drive . . . . . .
DVD Drive . . . . . . . .
Hard Drive . . . . . . . .
Internal Modem . . . . .
Internal LAN . . . . . . .
Infrared Port . . . . . . .
Power Management . . .
Pre-installed Software . .
Agate Tioman ProSwap . .
Phoenix NoteDock . . . .
Data Security . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
32
36
37
38
42
44
44
44
46
47
47
47
48
54
59
64
64
T h r e e
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 28
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
SECTION THREE
USING YOUR LIFEBOOK
E SERIES FROM FUJITSU
This section describes the indicators, buttons,
connections and operating modes of your
LifeBook E Series and their use.
STATUS INDICATOR PANEL
The Status Indicator panel is located in the
recess just above the keyboard. (Figure 3-1.)
The appropriate indicators become visible as
you use your notebook.
Power Indicator
The Power indicator tells you when the system
is operational. It is on steady when there is
power to your notebook, and blinks when the
system is in Suspend mode. It goes off when
the system has entered Save-to-Disk mode, or
the power is turned off from the power switch.
Power
Battery
Identifier
AC Adapter
Battery
Charging
CD-ROM
Drive Access
Battery
Level
Floppy Disk
Drive Access
Hard Drive
Access
PC Card
Access
PC Card
Slot Identifier
CapsLock
NumLk
Scr Lk
Figure 3-1 Status Indicator Panel
28
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 29
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
When your notebook has been shut
down from Windows, it is not the same
as turned off from the power switch. It is
in a pseudo-off state, with all applications closed, but can be turned on by
pressing the Suspend/Resume button.
It is drawing some current in the
pseudo-off state.
CAUTION
Your notebook’s power switch must be
turned off to prevent all current draw.
AC Adapter Indicator
The AC Adapter indicator tells you whether the
system is operating on an AC or auto/airline
adapter, or batteries alone. The indicator is On
when either of the adapters is active and Off
when power comes from the batteries alone. If a
battery is charging, the Power Adapter indicator
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
is active regardless of the setting of the power
switch. The AC Adapter indicator is also active
if you have shut down from Windows but have
not turned the power switch to Off. If there is
no battery charging, and the power switch is
Off, then the AC Adapter indicator and the
Battery indicators will all be Off.
Battery Indicators
The two sets of battery indicators show whether
or not the primary Lithium ion battery and/or
the optional second Lithium ion battery are
installed, and indicate the condition of each.
(Figure 3-2.) Battery 1 is the Lithium ion battery which is installed in Multi-function Bay 1
and Battery 2 is the Lithium ion battery which
is installed in Multi-function Bay 2. The battery
indicators are displayed only for a battery which
is installed.
A small arrow icon (Battery Charging indicator) appears to the left of each of the Battery
Level indicators and above the number (Battery
identifier) if that battery is charging. The
Battery Charging indicator flashes if the battery
is too hot or too cold to charge. (Figure 3-2.)
The Battery Charging indicators operate
whether the power switch is Off or On.
The symbols inside the battery outline of the
Battery Level indicator show the operating level
available in that battery. (Figure 3-2.) If there is
no battery charging and the power switch is Off
then the AC Adapter indicator and the Battery
indicators will all be off.
CAUTION
A shorted battery is damaged and must
be replaced. (See Figure 3-2.)
CAUTION
Turning off the power with the power
switch or using the Suspend/Resume
button when any of the Access indicators
are On may cause loss of data and/or
system errors.
29
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 30
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
76%–100%
51%–75%
26%–50%
13%–25%
Low Warning ≤12%
Dead Battery
Shorted Battery
Figure 3-2 Battery Level Indicator
CAUTION
Batteries subjected to shocks, vibration
temperatures or extreme temperatures
can be permanently damaged.
30
CD-ROM/DVD Drive Access Indicator
The CD-ROM/DVD Access indicator tells you
the CD-ROM or DVD drive is being accessed.
The CD-ROM/DVD Access indicator will flash
when the software tries to access a CD, DVD
or CD-ROM even if no CD-ROM or DVD
drive is installed.
POINT
The Windows CD automatic insertion
function will periodically check for a
CD installed in the drive, causing the
CD-ROM Access indicator to flash. The
CD automatic insertion function allows
your system to automatically start a CD
as soon as it is inserted in the drive and
the tray is closed. It will begin playing
an audio CD or will start an application
if the CD has an auto run file on it.
POINT
If you do not wish to have the CD
automatic insertion function on you
can disable it.
To disable the CD automatic insertion function
for Windows 95/98 do as follows:
1. Save all data and close all applications.
2. Click on the Start button.
3. Point to Settings.
4. Click on the Control Panel. The control
panel window will be displayed.
5. Double click on the System icon. The system
properties dialogue box will be displayed.
6. Click on the Device Manager tab. The
device list will be displayed.
7. Click on the + to the left of the CD-ROM
icon. The CD-ROM drive manufacturer’s
name and model will be displayed.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 31
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
8. Click on the CD-ROM drive manufacturer’s
name and model.
9. Click on Properties. The CD-ROM drive
manufacturer’s name and model properties
dialogue box will be displayed.
10. Click on the Settings tab.
11. Click on the automatic insertion notification
box to toggle it off.
12. Click on OK.
13. Click on OK in the system properties
dialogue box.
14. Restart your notebook according to the
message displayed.
You can re-enable the function by repeating the
process except in step 11 change the setting to on.
Hard Drive or Removable
Media Drive Access Indicator
The Hard Drive Access indicator tells you when
either the internal hard drive, an optional
second hard drive or an optional Zip drive
is being accessed.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
POINT
The Hard Drive Access indicator does
not show which hard drive or Zip drive,
is being accessed. It works the same for
any one.
Floppy Disk Drive Access Indicator
The Floppy Disk Drive Access indicator tells you
when a floppy disk drive or SuperDisk drive is
being accessed. The Floppy Disk Drive Access
indicator will flash when your software tries to
access a floppy disk or SuperDisk even if no
floppy disk drive or SuperDisk drive is installed.
PC Card Access Indicators
The PC Card Access indicators tell you when
an installed PC Card is being accessed. Card 1
is the bottom connector inside the slot and
Card 2 is the upper connector inside the card
slot. Type III cards are always Card 1 only.
The PC Card Access indicator will flash if
your software tries to access a PC Card even
if none are installed.
NumLk Indicator
The NumLk indicator tells you the internal keyboard is set in ten-key numeric keypad mode.
(See page 36 for more information on the numeric
keypad.) You can activate the NumLk mode by
pressing the NumLk/Scr Lk key while holding
down the Shift key. Deactivate the setting the
same way that you activated it.
CapsLock Indicator
The CapsLock indicator tells you when the keyboard is set for all capital letters. Activate the all
capital letters setting by pressing the CapsLock
key on the keyboard. Deactivate the setting the
same way that you activated it.
Scr Lk Indicator
The Scr Lk indicator tells you when scroll lock
is active. You can activate the scroll lock by
pressing the NumLk/Scr Lk key. Deactivate the
setting the same way that you activated it.
31
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 32
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
INTEGRATED POINTING DEVICE
Your LifeBook E Series will have either an integrated ErgoTrac or a TouchPad pointing device.
Please refer to the section that describes your
pointing device.
Integrated ErgoTrac Pointing Device
The ErgoTrac pointing device is composed
of a short, comfortable, dish-shaped pointing
device and two buttons located in front of the
keyboard. The ErgoTrac pointing device has
the function of a mouse, and moves the cursor
around on the screen – up, down, left and right.
A light pressure with the tip of your finger is all
that is required to operate the ErgoTrac. The
more pressure you use the faster the cursor will
move. The second part of the ErgoTrac pointing
device – the buttons – function as mouse buttons, and the functions they perform depend
on the application you are running. Figure 3-3
shows the position of the ErgoTrac pointing
device and buttons.
Cursor Control
Left Button
Right Button
Figure 3-3 ErgoTrac Pointing Device
POINT
You may have a TouchPad if your
specified such in your Built-to-order
LifeBook configuration.
32
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 33
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
An external mouse can be connected
to the PS/2 port on the back side of the
notebook, and used simultaneously with
the integrated pointing device. However,
if you boot the system with the PS/2
mouse connected the internal pointing
device will be disabled as specified in
your BIOS settings. You can set the
internal pointing device so that it is
always enabled. (See Section 4,
page 90 for details).
Clicking
Clicking means pushing and releasing a button.
To left-click move the screen cursor to the item
you wish to select, press the left pointing device
button once, and then immediately release it. To
right-click, move the mouse cursor to the item
you wish to select, press the right pointing
device button once, and then immediately
release it. (Figure 3-4.)
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
Double-Clicking
Double-clicking means following the preceding
Clicking procedure, but pressing the pointing
device button twice in rapid succession.
Double-clicking works with both the left
and right buttons.
Left Click
Left Double Click
CAUTION
If the interval between clicks is too long,
double-clicking will not be executed.
POINT
The interval between presses for double
clicking, and other parameters of pointing
and selecting, can be adjusted with the
selections in the dialog box of the mouse
icon in your Windows Control panel.
Figure 3-4 Clicking
Dragging
Dragging means selecting an item with the
pointing cursor, and while keeping the left
pointing device button depressed, moving
the cursor to the desired new location, then
releasing the button. (Figure 3-5.)
Figure 3-5 Dragging
33
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 34
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
Integrated Touchpad Pointing Device
The TouchPad pointing device is composed
of a small rectangular touch sensitive pointer
control and two buttons located in front of the
keyboard. The TouchPad pointing device has the
function of a mouse, and moves the cursor
around on the screen – up, down, left and right.
A light pressure with the tip of your fingernail
is all that is required to operate the TouchPad.
Pencil erasers, etc. don’t work. The faster you
move your finger the faster the cursor will move.
The second part of the TouchPad pointing device
– the buttons – function as mouse buttons, and
the functions they perform depend
on the application you are running. Figure 3-6
shows the position of the TouchPad and buttons.
Clicking
Clicking means pushing and releasing a button.
To left-click, move the screen cursor to the item
you wish to select, press the left pointing device
button once, and then immediately release it.
To right-click, move the mouse cursor to the
item you wish to select, press the right pointing
device button once, and then immediately
release it. (Figure 3-7.) You can also left click by
a light tap on the TouchPad ending with your
finger off the pad, instead of using the button.
Double-Clicking
Double-clicking means following the preceding
Clicking procedure, but pressing the pointing
device button twice in rapid succession. Doubleclicking works with either the left or the right
button. You can also double left click by two
light taps on the TouchPad ending with your
finger off the pad, instead of using the button.
Cursor
Control
POINT
The left mouse button functions can
also be performed with your finger on
the TouchPad.
Left
Button
Right Button
Figure 3-6 TouchPad Pointing Device
34
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 35
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Left-Click
Left Double-Click
Figure 3-7 Clicking
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
Dragging
Dragging means selecting an item with the
pointing cursor, and while keeping the left
pointing device button depressed, moving the
cursor to the desired new location, then releasing the button. (Figure 3-8.) Dragging can also
be done on the TouchPad – two light taps ending with your fingernail on the pad and then
moving, or holding the left button down and
moving your fingernail on the pad.
POINT
For your convenience, we have included
the Alps GlidePoint mouse driver for your
integrated Touchpad device on our
Recovery CD. Locate your Recovery CD
in the accessories box. Insert the
Recovery CD into your system while the
operating system is active and through
My Computer or Windows Explorer,
locate the directory D:\Drivers\Touchpad.
Follow the directions in the readme file in
this direcotry to install the optional driver.
CAUTION
If the interval between clicks is too long,
the double-click will not be executed.
POINT
The interval between clicks for double
clicking, and other parameters of pointing
and selecting, can be adjusted with the
selections in the dialog box of the mouse
icon in your Windows Control panel.
Figure 3-8 Dragging
Integrated Pointing Device
Control Adjustment
The Windows Control Panel provides customization of your pointing device from the mouse
icon. There are four (4) aspects of pointing
device operation which you can adjust.
■
Buttons – This lets you set up the buttons for
right or left handed operation and set the
time interval for double clicking.
35
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 36
S e c t i o n
■
■
T h r e e
Pointers – This lets you set up the size and
shape of the cursor for different functions.
Motion – This lets you set up the relation of
the speed of motion of your finger to the
motion of the cursor and to enable a trailing
tail for the cursor arrow.
■
General – This allows you to choose the type
of mouse being used. It is already set for your
integrated pointing device. You may need to
change it for an external mouse.
You may want to try practicing with different
adjustments until you find a combination that
is comfortable for you.
Function Keys
Numeric Keypad
Fn Key
Start Key
Start Key
Application Key
Cursor Keys
Figure 3-9 Keyboard
36
USING THE KEYBOARD
Your notebook has an integral 86-key keyboard.
(Figure 3-9.) The keys perform all the standard
functions of a 101-key keyboard and also
include Windows keys and other special function keys. This section describes only those
items specific to your notebook. They are the
numeric keypad, the cursor keys, the function
keys, the function extension key (Fn) and the
Windows keys.
Numeric Keypad
Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual
functions as both standard character keys and
numeric keypad keys. Figure 3-9 highlights
these keys. To switch into numeric keypad
mode, press the NumLk/Scr Lk while holding
down the Shift key. You can now enter numerals
0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction
( – ), multiplication ( * ), or division ( / ), and
enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function keys. The keys in the
numeric keypad are marked on the front edge
of the key to indicate their secondary functions.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:14 AM Page 37
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
To return these keys to their normal character
function, press the NumLk/Scr Lk while holding
down the Shift key again.
POINT
When an external numeric keypad is connected to the notebook the NumLk mode
enables the external keypad and disables
the built-in keyboard numeric keypad.
Cursor Keys
The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the
keyboard which allow you to move the cursor
up Õ, down Ô, left Ó and right È as your
application allows.
POINT
The integrated pointing device and/or
external mouse are also used for moving
the cursor around the screen.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
Function Keys
Your notebook has 12 function keys, F1 through
F12. The functions assigned to these keys differ
for each application. You should refer to your
software documentation to find out how these
keys are used. (See Figure 3-9.)
Fn Key
The Fn key provides extended functions for the
notebook and is always used in conjunction
with another key. (See Figure 3-9.)
Pressing F5 while holding down the Fn key
allows you to toggle between video compensation and no compensation. (Video compensation controls spacing on the display. When it is
enabled, displays with less than 1024 x 768 or
800 x 600 pixel resolution will still cover the
entire screen.)
Pressing F10 while holding down the Fn key
allows you to change your selection of where to
send your display video. Each time you press the
combination of keys you will step to the next
choice. The choices, in order, are: built-in display panel only, external monitor only, or both
built-in display panel and external monitor.
Windows Keys
Your notebook has three Windows keys, two
Start keys and an Application key. The Start key
displays the Start menu. This is the same as the
button on the toolbar which is typically at the
bottom of your Windows desktop. The
Application key has the same function in
Windows as the right mouse button, it displays
the Shortcut menu for whatever item is selected. See your Windows documentation for additional information. (See Figure 3-9.)
VOLUME CONTROL
All system and application functions have multiple volume controls which interact with each
other. There is the hardware volume control on
the right side panel of your notebook. There is
a volume control in the ESS AudioRack, your
operating system Sound Control panel and any
other application with sound.
37
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 38
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
Each setting source puts an upper limit on the
volume which can be set by the other sources.
For example if the hardware volume control is
turned all the way down, your software volume
control settings have no effect. By the same
token, if the ESS AudioRack has the sound
turned off, adjusting the hardware or other
application software volume settings will not
produce sound. One easy operating method is
to use the hardware and ESS AudioRack volume
controls to set an upper limit on sound level
and then make fine adjustments with other
application software.
CAUTION
The ESS AudioRack volume setting
sets the maximum volume level of the
hardware volume control knob.
POINT
Windows NT 4.0 does not support the
ESS AudioRack application.
38
CAUTION
If you use a speakerphone function,
be sure that the microphone setting in
the ESS AudioRack (recorder portion)
is disabled.
The Lithium ion battery operating time may
become shorter than the reference value if it is
used under the following conditions:
■
When used at temperatures that exceed a low
of 5°C or a high of 35°C. High temperatures
not only reduce charging efficiency, but
can also cause battery deterioration. (The
Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel
will flash when you try to charge a battery that
is outside its operating temperature range.)
■
The battery charging capacity is reduced as the
battery ages. If your battery is running low
quickly, you should replace it with a new one.
■
When using a high current device such as a
modem, a LAN card, a CD-ROM drive, or
the hard drive frequently.
BATTERIES
The Lithium ion batteries are rechargeable with
an operating time of up to three (3) hours
depending on active power management features and user activity levels. Your notebook can
be operated on the primary Lithium ion battery
alone or in a dual battery configuration with an
optional second Lithium ion battery. A built-in
bridge battery allows a charged Lithium ion
battery to be exchanged for a discharged one
by “warm-swapping”. To warm-swap, have a
charged battery ready, put your notebook in
Suspend mode, remove the low battery and
quickly insert a charged battery.
Using the AC adapter will conserve your battery
when using a high current device such as a
modem, a LAN card, a CD-ROM drive, or the
hard drive frequently. The Bridge battery can
only be recharged by using the AC adapter.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 39
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
CAUTION
Actual battery life will vary based on
screen brightness, applications, features,
power management settings, battery
condition, and other customer preferences. CD-ROM drive or hard drive
usage may also have a significant
impact on battery life.
CAUTION
Do not leave a faulty battery in your
notebook. It might damage your AC
adapter, optional auto/airline adapter,
another battery, or your notebook itself.
It may also prevent operation of your
notebook by draining all available current
into the bad battery.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
CAUTION
Under federal, state or local law it
may be illegal to dispose of batteries by
putting them in the trash. Please take
care of our environment and dispose
of batteries properly. Check with your
local government authority for details
regarding recycling or disposing of
old batteries. If you cannot find this
information elsewhere, contact your
support representative at 1-800-8FUJITSU
(1-800-838-5487).
Bridge Battery
The bridge battery is a NiCd battery that is
built-in your notebook and is constantly
being recharged under AC Power. A bridge|
battery allows a charged Lithium ion battery
to be exchanged for a discharged one by
“warm-swapping”.
To warm-swap have a charged battery ready,
put your notebook in Suspend mode, remove
the low battery and quickly insert a charged
battery. The bridge battery capacity is not
large, about 3 minutes, and can vary with the
condition of your notebook.
Three
Using
CAUTION
Data may be lost and/or system
errors introduced if the warm swap
is not performed quickly.
CAUTION
The bridge battery can not support an
operating notebook. The notebook must
be in Suspend mode.
39
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 40
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
Shorted Batteries
If your Status Indicator panel shows a shorted
battery, check the installation for that battery by
removing and re-installing it. If it still shows
that it is shorted, replace it with a new battery.
The Lithium ion batteries are recharged internally using the AC adapter or auto/airline
adapter. To recharge the batteries:
■
Make sure the battery to be charged is
installed in either Multi-function bay of
your notebook and connect the AC or
auto/airline adapter.
■
Make sure that the Battery Charging indicator to the left of the Battery Level indicator
of the battery to be charged is visible on the
Status Indicator panel.
■
Make sure the percentage charge is shown
inside the Battery Level icon. (Figure 3-2
on page 29.)
CAUTION
A shorted battery is damaged and must
be replaced so that it does not damage
anything else.
Recharging the Batteries
If you want to check the condition of either the
primary Lithium ion battery or an optional second Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level
indicators located on the Status Indicator panel.
These indicators change as the battery levels
change. Battery 1 is a Lithium ion battery which
is installed in Multi-function Bay 1 and Battery
2 is a Lithium ion battery which is installed in
Multi-function Bay 2. (Figure 3-2 on page 29.)
40
When two Lithium ion batteries are installed,
the charge/discharge rate of the primary and
optional second Lithium ion batteries are the
same, as they are connected in parallel and are
both charging and/or discharging at the same
time. Since the rates are the same, one may
finish charging or discharging before the other
if they were not at the same charge level when
they were installed and/or the AC or auto/
airline adapter was connected.
There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion
batteries, which means that you do not need to
discharge them completely before recharging.
A single fully discharged Lithium ion battery
will charge in approximately three (3) hours
when your notebook is Off or in Suspend mode.
The charging time from fully discharged for two
Lithium ion batteries together, is approximately
five (5) hours when your notebook is Off or in
Suspend mode. Of course partially charged batteries will not take as long to charge. The charge
times will be significantly longer if your notebook is in use while the batteries are charging
(from approximately nine (9) hours for one battery to approximately 15 hours for two batteries
with normal operating levels).
CAUTION
Using heavy current devices such as LAN
cards or frequent CD-ROM accesses may
prevent charging completely.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 41
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Low Battery State
When the battery is running low, your notebook beeps about every 15 seconds and the
Battery Level indicator(s) flash. If you do not
respond to the low battery alarm, the batteries
will continue to discharge until they are too low
to operate. When this happens there will be a
multiple beep alarm, the Battery Level indicator
will show dead battery, and your notebook will
go into Suspend mode to try and protect your
data as long as possible. Your power management settings do not affect what happens at the
dead battery alarm level. Your notebook will go
to Suspend mode.
CAUTION
You may not be able to hear the audio
alarms if the volume control is set too
low or is turned off by either hardware or
software but you will still be able to see
the Battery Level indicator(s) flash.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
When the low battery alarm occurs you need to
save all your active data and put your notebook
into Suspend mode until you can provide a new
power source. You should provide this power as
soon as possible. The new power source can be
a charged battery or a power adapter, either AC
or auto/airline.
CAUTION
When you are in Suspend mode there
must always be at least one power source
active. If you turn off the power with
the power switch, or remove all power
sources, battery, AC adapter or auto/
airline adapter, while your notebook is in
Suspend mode any data which has not
been saved to the hard drive will be lost.
CAUTION
There is no guarantee that data will not
be lost once your notebook enters the
Dead Battery Suspend mode.
Once your notebook goes into Dead Battery
Suspend mode you will be unable to resume
operation until you provide a source of power
either from an AC adapter, an optional auto/
airline adapter, or a charged battery. Dead
Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status
indicator just like the normal Suspend mode.
Once you have provided power, you will need
to press the Suspend/Resume button to resume
operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode,
your data can be maintained for some time, but
if a power source is not provided promptly, the
Power indicator will stop flashing and go out,
and you will have lost the data that was
not stored.
Once you provide power you can continue to use
your notebook while an adapter is charging the
battery, but the battery trickle charges under
these conditions. If you want to charge the
battery more quickly, put your notebook into
Suspend mode, or turn off your notebook while
the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power
Off on pages 24-25 for shutdown procedures.)
41
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 42
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
The modular floppy disk drive is a 3.5" drive
which can read and write on 1.44MB and
720KB memory capacity floppy disks. Floppy
disk format is controlled from your operating
system. (See your software documentation for
more information.) The modular floppy disk
drive can be used in Multi-function Bay 1,
externally with the FDD adapter, or you can use
an optional external floppy disk drive. The system will treat any floppy disk drive in exactly the
same way regardless of where it is installed.
(For floppy disk drive installation and removal
instructions see Multi-function Bays on pages 130131 and External Installation of a Floppy Disk
Drive on page 140.) When your system boots it
will always look first for a floppy disk drive in a
Multi-function Bay 1, and then look at the
external floppy disk drive port.
Loading a Floppy Disk
To load, insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk
drive, shutter side first and label up, until the
Eject button, above the floppy disk drive
opening, pops out. (Figure 3-10.)
POINT
When there is no floppy disk in the drive,
the Eject button is flush with the front of
your notebook.
Figure 3-10 Loading/Ejecting a Floppy Disk
CAUTION
To get your system to recognize a newly
installed floppy disk drive you must
restart your notebook.
Ejecting a Floppy Disk
To eject a disk, check that the Floppy Disk
Drive Access indicator is Off, (see pages 28
and 31) and press the Eject button.
(Figure 3-10.)
CAUTION
If you eject the disk while the Floppy
Disk Drive Access indicator is On, there is
a risk of damaging the data on the disk
or the disk drive.
42
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 43
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Using
LifeBook
E
Series
notebook’s operating system software to format
a floppy disk. Please refer to the operating system manual for step-by-step instructions.
■
Keep the floppy disk drive and disks
out of direct sunlight and away from
heating equipment.
To prevent data stored on a floppy disk from
being erased, slide the write protect tab on the
floppy disk to open up the small hole. This
makes the disk write protected. When you want
to write data to that disk, slide the write protect
tab the other way to close the small hole.
■
Avoid storing the floppy disk drive in
locations subject to shock and vibration.
■
Avoid using the floppy disk drive and disks
in damp and dusty locations.
■
Never use the floppy disk drive with any
liquid, metal, or other foreign matter inside
the floppy disk drive or disk.
■
Never store a floppy disk near a magnet or
magnetic field.
■
To clean, wipe the floppy disk drive clean
with a dry soft cloth or with a soft cloth
dampened with water or a solution of neutral
detergent. Never use benzene, paint thinner,
or other volatile material.
■
Never disassemble or dismantle your floppy
disk drive.
CAUTION
Formatting a previously used floppy
disk is an effective method of clearing a
disk as long as you realize that ALL the
information on the disk will be erased.
Write Protected
Figure 3-11 Floppy Disk Write Protect
Preparing a Floppy Disk for Use
Before you can use a new floppy disk, you need
to prepare it so your notebook knows where to
store information. This preparation is called
formatting or initializing a disk. You need to
format new 3.5" floppy disks, unless you purchase preformatted disks. You will use your
Care of Floppy Disk Drives and Disks
Avoid storing the floppy disk drive and
disks in extremely hot and cold locations,
or in locations subject to severe
temperature changes.
■
Three
Write Enabled
Your
43
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 44
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
SUPERDISKTM 120 DRIVE
CAUTION
The modular SuperDisk drive is a floppy disk
drive that can read and write both 120MB
Super floppy disks and standard 1.44MB and
720KB floppy disks. It takes the place of a floppy drive and offers greater removable media
storage capabilities.
Do not operate your CD-ROM/DVD
drive unless your notebook is sitting on a
flat surface and the adjustment feet are
folded against the bottom of the notebook. Using a CD when the drive
is not level may damage the drive
or prevent proper operation.
The SuperDisk drive works very much like a
regular floppy disk drive in your LifeBook E
Series. Please refer to the Floppy Disk Drive
section for usage and care information.
Figure 3-13 CD-ROM/DVD Drive
POINT
CD-ROM DRIVE
The modular CD-ROM drive is a 24x
maximum reader.
DVD DRIVE
Figure 3-12 SuperDisk Drive
44
The modular DVD Drive is a 1.5-speed maximum reader and takes the place of the CDROM drive in Multi-Function Bay 2. It works
very much like a CD-ROM drive in that it can
read CD-ROMs as well as DVDs. It can also
play Audio CDs.
DVD playback is not supported in
Windows NT 4.0.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 45
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Using
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
Loading a CD or DVD
■ Make sure that the angle adjustment feet on
the bottom of the notebook are folded
against the bottom of the notebook.
Make sure there is power to your notebook.
■
Push, gently but firmly, and release the eject
button on the front of the drive to open
the holder tray, the tray will come out a
short distance.
■
Gently pull the tray out until a CD-ROM/DVD
can be easily placed in the tray.
■
If there was a protective sheet in the tray
when it was shipped, make sure it
has been removed.
■
If you have disabled your CD automatic
insertion function you will have to start
the CD from your desktop, as your
notebook will not automatically
recognize that the CD has been loaded.
Care of CD and DVDs
CD/DVDs are precision devices and will
function reliably if given reasonable care.
Place the CD/DVD into the tray, label side up,
with the hole in the center of the CD/DVD
snapped onto the raised circle in the center
of the tray.
■
Close the tray.
■
After the CD/DVD is loaded, it will take a
short time for your notebook to recognize it.
Three
■
POINT
Figure 3-14 Loading the CD-ROM/DVD Tray
■
Always store your CD-ROM in its case when
it is not in use.
■
When removing the CD-ROM from its case,
press down on the holder’s center while
lifting out the CD-ROM by its edges.
■
Always handle a CD-ROM by the edges and
avoid touching the surface.
■
Avoid storing any CD-ROM in extreme
temperatures.
■
Do not bend CD-ROMs or set heavy objects
on them.
45
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 46
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
HARD DRIVE
Figure 3-15 CD-ROM Handling
■
Never write on the label surface with a ball
point pen, pencil or similar device.
■
If a CD-ROM is subjected to a sudden
change in temperature, cold to warm condensation may form on the surface. Wipe the
moisture off with a clean, soft, lint free cloth
and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT
use a hair dryer or heater to dry a CD-ROM.
■
If a CD-ROM is dirty, use only a CD-ROM
cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free
cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping
to the outer edge.
46
The internal hard drive capacity is dependent
on which model you are using. See Appendix
A (pages 182–186) or your packing label for
model information. If you are using the optional second hard drive for the first time since you
installed it, you can get your notebook to recognize it by opening the Windows Control Panel
and opening Add New Hardware which will
step you through the process of having
Windows look for your newly installed device.
Formatting the Hard Drive
The hard drive inside your notebook is formatted (initialized) at the factory. You do not need
to format it under normal circumstances. If
you purchase an optional second hard drive
you will need to Fdisk and format it before you
use it the first time. Check your operating
system documentation for information on
initializing a hard drive.
CAUTION
If you reformat the internal hard drive
ALL data including the operating system,
applications software and data will be
erased. Unless data is copied to floppy
disks or other data storage media it will
be permanently lost. All software will be
need to be re-installed and data files
restored from your back-up disks. See
the operating system manual for more
information on backing-up your data
files. The factory installed software,
including the operating system, can be
restored from the Recovery CD-ROM
which came in the accessories box when
you purchased your notebook. (See
Restoring Your Pre-installed Software
from CD-ROM on page 174 for more
information.) Any application software
which you have purchased and installed
will have to be re-installed from the
original source. When doing a recovery
remember that you must allocate space
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 47
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
for the Save-to-Disk function if you have
it enabled. (See Setting Up Your Save-toDisk File Allocation on pages 124-125
for more information.)
INTERNAL MODEM
If your LifeBook is configured with an internal
modem daughter card in the Communications
port, it is a K56Flex fax/data/voice modem with
v.90 support. The voice functions of the
modem include speakerphone and answering
machine capabilities. The answering machine
capabilities require the use of third party software not included with your notebook.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
INTERNAL LAN
INFRARED PORT
If your LifeBook is configured with an internal
LAN daughter card, it is a Fast Ethernet
(10/100 Base-T/Tx) network interface with an
RJ-45 connector. Your internal LAN card will
need to be configured for use in the Windows
network control panel. Please refer to your systems administrator for information on your
particular network configuration.
Infrared IrDA-compatible communication is a
function that allows for wireless data transfer
between your notebook and other IrDA-compatible devices. Examples of IrDA-compatible
devices are another computer or a printer. When
carrying out this kind of communication, both
devices must be set so their infrared ports are
directly facing each other without obstructions.
A distance of 6" to 36" between the device ports
is ideal. Dirt or scratches on the lens of your
notebook or the other device will degrade
performance. This is especially true for Fast IrDA
applications such as a transfer to an Ethernet.
POINT
Your LifeBook E Series may be configured
with no device in the Communications
port if you specified as such in your
built-to-order configuration.
POINT
Figure 3-16 Internal Modem or LAN
The internal modems on all Fujitsu notebooks from Fujitsu PC Corporation are not
qualified for use with telephone systems
outside the United States and Canada and
may not operate in other countries.
If you are using Windows 98, you can use the
Infrared Recipient program for infrared file transfers. LapLink software can also be used for infrared
file transfers in Windows 95 and Windows 98. See
your online help menus for more information.
POINT
Windows NT 4.0 does not support the
infrared port on your LifeBook E Series.
47
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 48
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the infrared port
lens. Scratches, dirt or other surface
marks can effect operation.
The following conditions may interfere with
infrared communications:
■
When the infrared communication ports
are not directly facing each other, or some
obstacle is between them.
■
When the infrared communication ports
are too far apart.
■
When a television or radio remote control
unit, or a wireless headphone is being
used nearby.
■
When a strong light such as direct sunlight,
fluorescent light, or incandescent light shines
on the port.
48
CAUTION
Do not move either device during
communication as it may interrupt
data transmission.
POWER MANAGEMENT
Your LifeBook E Series has many features for
conserving battery power. Some power savings
features are automatic and have no user control, such as those for the internal modem,
while others depend on the parameters you
set to best suit your operating conditions.
Other power saving features turn the display
brightness down, limit the use of high power
devices, activate an appropriate power savings
profile, and put your notebook in Suspend
mode when not actually performing an
operation. As with all mobile, battery-powered
computers, there is a trade-off between
performance and power savings.
Internal power management for your notebook
may be controlled from settings made in the
BIOS setup utility prebundled power management application, or from settings made in
your operating system.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 49
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Using
If your notebook is suspended, pushing the
Suspend/Resume button will return your notebook to active operation at the point where it
went into suspension. You can tell whether or
not your system is in Suspend mode by looking
at the Power indicator. (See pages 28-29.) If it is
visible and not flashing, your notebook is fully
operational. If it is visible and flashing, your
notebook is in Suspend mode. If it is not visible, the power is Off or your notebook is in
Save-to-Disk mode. When you receive your
LifeBook E Series it will be set to the default,
which is Suspend mode.
LifeBook
E
Series
drive and all of the other internal components
except those necessary to maintain system
memory, recognize the Suspend/Resume
button and restart. Your notebook can be
put in Suspend mode by:
■
Pressing the Suspend/Resume button when
your system is in the On state.
■
Selecting Suspend from the Windows
Shut Down Menu (Windows 95 and
Windows NT).
■
Selecting Standby from the Windows Shut
Down menu (Windows 98).
■
Selecting System Suspend from the
PowerPanel toolbar menu (Windows 95
and Windows NT).
■
Timing out from lack of activity.
■
Battery level reaching the Dead Battery
Warning condition.
Figure 3-17 Suspend/Resume Button
CAUTION
Loss of all power sources, including
batteries, while in the Suspend mode will
cause lost data and inability to return
to operation with the Suspend/
Resume button.
Suspend Mode
The Suspend mode, or Standby mode in
Windows 98, saves the contents of your notebook’s system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts
while turning off the CPU, the display, the hard
Three
Using the Suspend/Resume Button
When your notebook is active, the Suspend/
Resume button, (Figure 1-7 on page 6), can be
used to manually put your notebook into
Suspend mode. The Suspend/Resume button is
located next to the Status Indicator panel above
the keyboard of your notebook. (Figure 3-17.)
Push the Suspend/Resume button, when your
notebook is active but no Access indicators are
on and release the button (immediately). You
will hear two short beeps and then your system
will enter suspend mode.
Your
Your notebook’s RAM typically stores the file(s)
on which you are working, the open application(s) and any other data required to support
49
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 50
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
the operation(s) in progress. When you resume
operation from Suspend mode, it returns to
the point in the operation where it left off.
You must use the Suspend/Resume button
to resume operation, and there must be an
adequate power source available, or your
notebook will not resume.
Using the Suspend/Resume Button to
Perform Save-to-Disk
When your notebook is active, the Suspend/
Resume button, (Figure 3-17), can be used to
manually put your notebook into Save-To-Disk
mode. However, you must first enable Save-toDisk mode one of the following ways:
■
■
50
For Windows 98 you must enable Save-toDisk mode in the BIOS Setup utility Power
menu. (See page 56 for more information on
the Power menu of the BIOS Setup utility.)
For Windows 95 and Windows NT you can
simply click the Save-to-Disk activation button on the PowerPanel toolbar menu.
(See page 56 for more information on
PowerPanel.)
Push the Suspend/Resume button, when your
notebook is active but no Access indicators are
on and release the button (immediately). You
will hear two short beeps and then your system
will flash the Save-to-Disk screen, and enter
Save-to-Disk mode.
If your notebook is in Save-to-Disk mode,
pushing the Suspend/Resume button will
return your notebook to active operation at the
point where it went into Save-to-Disk mode.
You can tell whether or not your system is in
Save-to-Disk mode by looking at the Power
indicator. (See pages 28-29.) If it is visible and
not flashing, your notebook is fully operational.
If it is visible and flashing, your notebook is in
Suspend mode. If it is not visible, the power is
Off or your notebook is in Save-to-Disk mode.
Save-to-Disk Mode
The Save-to-Disk function, saves the contents of
your notebook’s system memory to the hard
drive and shuts down whenever you:
■
Press the Suspend/Resume button until
acknowledged with Save-to-Disk mode
enabled from the Power menu of the
BIOS setup utility.
■
Select Suspend from the Windows Shut
Down menu with Save-to-Disk mode
enabled by the BIOS setup utility (Windows
95 and Windows NT only.)
■
Select Save-to-Disk activation from the
PowerPanel toolbar or menu (Windows 95
and Windows NT only.)
■
Select Standby from the Windows Shut
Down menu with Save-to-Disk enabled by
the BIOS Setup Utility (Windows 98 only).
■
Time out from lack of activity with Save-ToDisk mode enabled from the Power Savings
menu of the BIOS setup utility.
Your notebook’s system memory typically stores
the file(s) on which you are working, the open
application(s) and any other data required to
support the operation(s) in progress. When the
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 51
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Save-to-Disk function is activated your notebook
saves the contents of the system memory to a file
on the internal hard drive, and then automatically shuts off power to your notebook. When you
resume operation by pressing the Suspend/
Resume button, you return to the point in the
operation where you left off, before going into
Save-to-Disk mode.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
POINT
Disabling the Suspend/Resume button
prevents it from being used to put your
notebook in Suspend or Save-to-Disk
mode. The resume function of the button
cannot be disabled. (See the Power
Savings Menu of the BIOS setup utility,
pages 107-109, for more information.)
POINT
If your notebook is active when you
enter the Suspend or Save-to-Disk mode,
changes to open files are not lost. The
files are left open and memory is kept
active during Suspend mode or the
memory is transferred to the internal
hard drive during Save-to-Disk mode.
CAUTION
Be sure you know which settings are
active for the Suspend/Resume button
before you use it; misuse can result in
data loss. (See the Power Menu of the
BIOS setup utility, pages 107-109, for
more information.)
CAUTION
The Suspend or Save-to-Disk mode
should not be used with certain PC Cards.
Check your PC Card documentation for
more information.
CAUTION
If you are running your notebook on
battery power, be aware that the battery
continues to discharge while your notebook is in suspend mode, though not as
fast as when fully operational. With a
fully charged internal Lithium ion battery
the suspend mode will maintain your
status for 24 hours or more.
51
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 52
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
POINT
When PC Cards or external devices are
in use, Save-to-Disk mode cannot return
to the exact state prior to suspension,
because all of the peripheral devices will
be re-initialized when the system restarts.
POINT
The main advantage of using the
Save-to-Disk function is that power is
not required to maintain your data. This
is particularly important if you will be
leaving your notebook in a suspended
state for a prolonged period of time. The
drawback of using Save-to-Disk mode
is that it lengthens the power down and
power up sequences and resets
peripheral devices.
52
POINT
Save-to-Disk mode requires allocating a
significant amount of hard drive capacity
for saving all system memory, which
reduces your usable disk space. When
you purchase your notebook it will have
space allocated for the memory installed.
If you upgrade the original system by
adding a memory upgrade module
without changing the size of your Saveto-Disk allocation you will get an error
message when you try to activate Saveto-Disk mode and it will not work. Use
the PHDISK Utility to increase the size
of the Save-to-Disk file, SAVE2DSK.BIN.
(Refer to Setting Up Your Save-to-Disk
File Allocation on pages 124-125 for
more information.) If you need help
contact your support representative
for recommendations.
Idle Mode
Idle mode is one of the power management
parameters. When Idle mode is enabled the
CPU is put into low-speed operation when
there is no activity (keystroke, pointer action,
sound generation, video display change,
modem transmission or reception, etc.) on
your notebook for 16 seconds. Any activity will
cause the normal operation to restart automatically. This feature is independent of the
Suspend/Resume modes. This parameter is
enabled and disabled in the BIOS setup utility.
(See page 83.)
Standby Mode
Standby mode is one of the power management
parameters. When Standby mode is activated,
your notebook puts the CPU in low-speed
operation, shuts off the display and turns off
the hard drive when there is no activity (keystroke, pointer action, sound generation, video
display change, modem transmission or reception, etc.) on your notebook for the user selected time-out period. (See page 83.) Any activity
will cause your notebook to return to normal
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 53
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
operation automatically. This feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume button. This
parameter is enabled and disabled in the BIOS
setup utility.
POINT
The Idle mode and Standby mode features described above are only available
in Windows 95 and Windows NT.
Windows 98 has its own integrated
power management features that include
the functionality of those listed above.
Video Timeout
The Video Timeout is one of the power management parameters which saves power by
turning off the display if there is no keyboard
or pointer activity for the user selected timeout
period. Any keyboard or pointer activity will
cause the display to restart automatically. This
feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume
button. This parameter is enabled and disabled
in the BIOS setup utility. (See page 108.)
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
Hard Disk Timeout
The Hard Disk Timeout is one of the power
management parameters which saves power
by turning off the hard drive if there is no hard
drive access for the timeout period which has
been set in the BIOS setup utility. (See page
108.) Any attempt to access the hard drive will
cause the hard drive to restart automatically.
This feature is independent of the Suspend/
Resume button. This parameter is enabled and
disabled in the BIOS setup utility.
Windows Power Management
Control Panels
The Power Management icon in the Windows 98
Control Panel allows you to configure some of
the power management settings that are normally controlled by the BIOS. For instance, you can
set timeout values in the Power Management
Control Panel for turning off the display and for
turning off hard disks. You can specify these
timeout values based on whether you are running on batteries or AC.
The Power icon in the Windows 95 Control
Panel will allow you to set timeout values for
the hard drive only.
ACPI and Windows 98
Short for Advanced Configuration & Power
Interface, a power management specification
developed by Intel, Microsoft, and Toshiba.
ACPI, which is part of the Windows 98
operating system, enables the operating system
to control the amount of power given to each
device attached to the computer. With ACPI,
the operating system can turn off peripheral
devices, such as CD-ROM players, when they
are not in use.
Due to ongoing industry development of
ACPI technology, we have configured your
LifeBook E Series notebook to APM
(Advanced Power Management) mode.
53
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 54
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE
Your LifeBook E Series comes with pre-installed
software for playing audio and video files of
various formats. In addition there is file transfer
software, virus protection software, and Power
Management software.
All of the pre-installed software can be accessed
from the Program folder of the Windows Start
menu. If you aren’t sure what software is preinstalled check the Program folder. If you need
assistance with an individual application use
their online help.
SoftPEG MPEG File Player
The MPEG file player displays a screen to find
the file which you wish to play. You can setup
the list to select from limited to particular types
of files or display all files. Opening the desired
file will play it. Online help screens are available
for more information.
SoftPEG Video CD Player
This control resembles a VCR player front panel
and is operated in the same way. When you
point to a button, a small explanation of the use
of the button will appear. When you left-click
on the button it will activate. Online help
screens are available for more information.
(SoftPEG is pre-installed on Windows 95 and
Windows 98 systems only.)
PC Doctor
PC Doctor by Watergate Software is primarily
for use by your support representative when
helping you with trouble shooting.
POINT
You can modify the set up of certain
audio parameters in the BIOS setup
utility, Advanced Menu – Multimedia
Device Configuration Submenu.
(See page 84.)
ESS AudioRack™
The control of the AudioRack player software
(AudioRack32) resembles the front panels of
a rack of stereo equipment and is operated in
much the same way. There is also AudioRack
recorder software (AudioRecorder). Online
help screens are accessible from the AudioDrive
panel of AudioRack32, click on the Help button
for more information. In the AudioRecorder
dialog box, click on Help in the top taskbar.
In AudioRack32 the AudioDrive panel lets
you turn on and off the available functions.
When you left-click on a button it will activate.
When a function is active, its button on the
AudioDrive shows a green dot and its control
panel is in the equipment rack. When it is off
the dot on the button is black and the control
panel is not in the rack. You activate a slider or
knob on a control panel by dragging it. The
functions available are DAT (Digital Audio Tape
player), 3D (3D-Stereo sound control), MIDI,
Mixer and CD (Audio CD player).
ESS AudioRack is pre-installed on Windows 95
and Windows 98 systems only.
54
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 55
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
For maximum frequency response and
bandwidth, leave the graphic equalizer
levels at the mid-point (zero level). To
customize the frequency response to
your personal taste, adjust accordingly.
CAUTION
The ESS AudioRack volume settings
set the maximum volume level of the
hardware volume control knob for
that function.
CAUTION
If you use a speakerphone function, be
sure that the microphone setting in the
ESS AudioRack is disabled.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
LapLink
LapLink, by Traveling Software, file transfer
software provides direct file transfers to other
computers. Data transfers can be via internal
modem, a PC Card modem, the infrared port,
a serial cable, or a parallel cable (cables are
not included). See the LapLink online help
screens for operating instructions.
LapLink is pre-installed on Windows 95 and
Windows 98 systems only.
Card Executive
Card Executive, by Phoenix Technologies allows
you to configure PCMCIA cards in Windows
NT 4.0. Consult the on-line documentation for
information on how to use this program.
Card Executive is pre-installed on Windows NT
4.0 systems only.
McAfee VirusScan
Running your McAfee VirusScan program after
loading data or programs from a floppy disk,
CD-ROM, modem data transfer, or infrared
data transfer is a precaution that will protect
the data on your hard drive from contamination or destruction. See your VirusScan online
help screens or online manual for information
on how and when to run this program.
PMSet 98
PMSet 98 is a power management application
which allows you to monitor battery status. See
your online help screens for information on
how to use the program.
PMSet 98 is pre-installed on Windows 98
systems only.
POINT
Due to the fact that the LifeBook E Series
does not support LCD Backlighting control and CPU Clock control, these options
are not selectable in the Power Control
tab of PMSet98.
55
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 56
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
PowerPanel
PowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies provides
Windows desktop access to a comprehensive
combination of power management settings
without entering the BIOS setup utility.
PowerPanel is pre-installed on Windows 95 and
Windows NT systems only.
The PowerPanel icon looks like an atom with
its cloud of electrons. This icon will open the
PowerPanel menu. You can view the menu in
icon format along the edge of your desktop by
moving the cursor against the edge where you
have chosen to keep your PowerPanel toolbar
and letting it sit there until the toolbar appears.
(The default position for the toolbar is the left
side of the screen, but you can move it to
whichever edge you like by dragging.)
The power management toolbar has ten power
profile choices and six activation choices.
When you switch to AC powered operation the
PowerPanel toolbar will automatically change to
indicate AC power operation and will show the
AC Power profile as active.
56
The profiles are groups of system settings
designed to fit power operation to specific user
operating conditions. The activations are shortcut ways to turn on specific power management
features of your notebook. Some of the profiles
can be edited and saved from the PowerPanel
application, some can be edited and saved from
the BIOS setup utility and only viewed from
PowerPanel, and some are factory set and can
only be viewed from either PowerPanel or the
BIOS setup utility.
■
Green PC.
■
AC Profile.
■
Word Processing.
■
Communication.
■
Games.
The activation choices are:
■
System Suspend.
■
System Save-to-Disk.
■
System Standby.
The profile choices are:
■
Hard Disk Standby.
(This group is factory set.)
■
Modem Power Toggle.
Video Standby.
■
Maximum Battery Life.
■
■
Maximum Performance.
■
Power Management Off.
The factory set Maximum Power Savings profile
is designed around trade offs of performance
and battery life. For true maximum battery life
keep the display and volume levels as low as
possible and use the custom settings recommended in Section Three on page 107.
(This one is set only from the
BIOS setup utility.)
■
Custom Settings.
(This group is set from PowerPanel.)
■
Presentation.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 57
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
The AC Power profile is activated automatically when a power adapter is being
used, unless it is overridden by another
selection made after the adapter became
active. It can be reactivated by selecting
it or it can be activated by selection, even
when operating only on battery power.
POWERPANEL ONLINE HELP
To access help with your power management
settings, move your cursor to the PowerPanel
toolbar and right click. (See Clicking on
page 33.) From the menu that appears select
PowerPanel Help Topics.
POWERPANEL CUSTOMIZATION
To modify your PowerPanel toolbar or create
a custom toolbar, move your cursor to the
PowerPanel toolbar and right click. From the
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
menu that appears select Customize. Within the
Customize dialog box you can choose to have
the toolbar display at all times or to use your
custom toolbar. You can also select from the
same menu to Hide the toolbar. If you hide the
toolbar you will have to double click on the
edge where the toolbar was located to display it.
If you select Exit from the PowerPanel
menu you will turn off the PowerPanel completely. To turn it back on, go to the Program
folder of the Start menu, select PowerPanel and
click on it.
MAXIMUM BATTERY LIFE PROFILE
The Maximum Battery Life profile is a factory
installed combination of timeouts and other
power savings parameters read directly from
the BIOS, and chosen as the settings that will
produce the longest possible battery life.
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE PROFILE
The Maximum Performance profile is a factory
installed combination of timeouts and other
power savings parameters read directly from
the BIOS and chosen as the settings that will
produce superior performance with reasonable
battery life.
POWER MANAGEMENT OFF
Turns off power management control from
Windows and PowerPanel and turns it over
directly to the BIOS.
CUSTOM SETTINGS PROFILE
The Custom Settings profile has those power
saving parameters that you set in the BIOS
setup utility using the Power Savings Menu
Customize feature. (See Power Savings on
page 107.)
57
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 58
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
POINT
The Maximum Power Savings, Maximum
Performance, and Power Management
Off profiles are read only. The Custom
Settings Profile can only be changed
from the BIOS setup Utility.
PRESENTATION PROFILE
The Presentation profile is the same combination of timeouts and other power savings parameters as the Maximum Battery Life profile
except that the display is never turned off.
(This profile was designed to enhance the
use of your notebook for slide show
style presentations.)
GREEN PC PROFILE
The Green PC profile has the Video timeout
and the Hard Drive timeout enabled but no
standby or suspension modes enabled.
58
AC PROFILE
GAMES PROFILE
The AC power profile has all timeouts disabled
and no other power management features
enabled. This profile is activated automatically
by plugging in a power adapter.
The Games profile is a factory installed combination of timeouts and other power savings
parameters chosen as the settings that will produce superior performance with reasonable battery life when playing games on your notebook.
WORD PROCESSING PROFILE
The Word Processing profile is a factory
installed combination of timeouts and other
power savings parameters chosen as the settings
that will produce superior performance with
reasonable battery life when using your notebook for doing word processing.
COMMUNICATION PROFILE
The Communication profile is a factory
installed combination of timeouts and other
power savings parameters chosen as the settings
that will produce superior performance with
reasonable battery life when using your notebook with the modem active such as during
Internet, fax or speakerphone activities.
SYSTEM SUSPEND ACTIVATION
Clicking on the Suspend button or selecting
System Suspend on the PowerPanel menu will
put your notebook in Suspend mode. Pressing
the Suspend/Resume button turns the power
back on and lets you begin where you left off.
(See page 49.)
SYSTEM SAVE-TO-DISK ACTIVATION
Clicking on the Save-to-Disk button or selecting System Save to Disk on the PowerPanel
menu will put your notebook in Save-to-Disk
mode. Your notebook will be left in the
Windows 95 pseudo-off state. If the power
switch is not turned off your notebook can be
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 59
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
restarted by pressing the Suspend/Resume button which will cause the system memory to
reload from the hard drive and let you begin
where you left off. (See Figure 3-17 on page 49,
and Save-to-Disk Mode on pages 50-51.)
SYSTEM STANDBY ACTIVATION
Clicking on the System Standby button or
selecting System Standby on the PowerPanel
menu will put your notebook in Standby mode.
You can return your notebook to normal operation by performing any activity such as pressing
a key or touching the pointing device.
HARD DISK STANDBY ACTIVATION
Clicking on the Hard Disk Standby button or
selecting Hard Disk Standby on the PowerPanel
menu will turn off your internal hard drive. You
can return your notebook to normal operation
by performing any hard drive operation.
MODEM POWER TOGGLE
Clicking on the Modem Power Toggle
button or selecting Modem Power Toggle on
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
the PowerPanel menu will turn the power to
your modem on or off. To turn it to the other
condition select Modem Power Toggle again.
Tioman supports the hot-swapping of the
following devices in...
VIDEO STANDBY ACTIVATION
■
Clicking on the Video Standby button or selecting Video Standby on the PowerPanel menu
turns off the power to the display. You can
return your notebook to normal operation by
performing any activity such as pressing a key
or touching the ErgoTrac pointing device.
Multi-function Bay 1
3.5” floppy disk drive
■
Lithium ion battery
■
Optional SuperDisk drive
Multi-function Bay 2
24x maximum CD-ROM drive
■
■
Optional 1.5-speed maximum
DVD-ROM drive
■
Lithium ion battery w/ Adapter
■
Weight Saver
■
Optional Second 5.0GB hard drive
■
Optional Iomega Zip 100 drive
AGATÉ TIOMAN HOT-SWAP
Tioman allows you to hot-swap your LifeBook
E Series peripheral devices in the Multi-function Bays of your notebook, by turning off the
IDE interface to the bays to allow safe removal
of devices while the system is active and turning
the IDE interface on again once new devices
have been inserted properly. Note: Tioman is
pre-installed on Windows 95 and Windows 98
systems only.
Three
Using
59
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 60
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
General Guidelines for Using Tioman
Tioman allows you to exchange removable
devices without suspending the system by
turning off the IDE interface to both Multifunction Bays simultaneously. At this point
the system is still active but in a safe mode
where you may swap a single device out of
either Multi-function Bay, swap devices in
both Multi-function Bays or do nothing. The
software will remove all drive letters from ‘My
Computer’ and ‘Windows Explorer’ (Consult
Windows’ on-line help menus for information
about ‘My Computer’ and ‘Windows Explorer’)
associated with the devices you removed and
replace the drive letters in ‘My Computer’ and
‘Windows Explorer’ with designators for the
newly inserted devices. The ‘Taskbar Icon’
and ‘ToolTip Balloon’ will be updated to reflect
the current devices inserted in the bays.
Note: The information in this section provides
a general description of how the Tioman
software functions. For specific instructions
on hot-swapping devices see the section
‘Removing and Inserting Devices’.
60
Tioman Taskbar Icon
When your system is running in Windows you
will notice that small bay icons are contained in
the ‘System Tray’ in the lower right hand corner
of the Windows desktop. The left icon corresponds to Multi-function Bay 1 and the right
icon to Multi-function Bay 2. These taskbar
icons provide the quickest way to hot-swap
your notebook devices, (See the next section
‘Removing and Inserting Devices’ for specific
details) as well as acting as visual cues for the
current inserted devices. Hover over either icon
with the pointing device cursor and the
‘ToolTip Balloon’ will display the name of the
inserted device. Right-click on either icon to
display a menu which offers choices for swapping devices, accessing help menus, displaying
properties for the inserted device and providing
information about the Tioman software.
Use the following table as a guide to identify
which ‘ToolTip Balloon’ names are associated
with your Multi-function Bay devices:
Device
Floppy Disk
Drive
ToolTip Balloon
Diskette drive in bay
Battery
Battery in bay
CD-ROM
CD-ROM drive in bay
(Multi-function Bay 2 only)
DVD-ROM
CD-ROM drive in bay
(Multi-function Bay 2 only)
Weight Saver
(Multi-function Bay 2 only)
Weight Saver
2nd Hard Drive
Hard drive in bay
(Multi-function Bay 2 only)
POINT
Due to the special design and configuration of
the Iomega Zip 100 drive the 'ToolTip Balloon'
identifier may vary. Please consult the documentation that comes with your Optional
Iomega Zip 100 drive for specific information
on how to properly configure and use the
device with Agate Tioman software.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 61
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
Due to the special design of the SuperDisk
120 Drive it can be configured as a
removable device as well as a standard
bootable floppy drive. Because of this
unique configuration the ‘ToolTip Balloon’
identifier for the SuperDisk 120 Drive may
vary. Please consult the documentation
that comes with your Optional SuperDisk
120 Drive for specific information on how
to properly configure and use the device
with Agate Tioman software.
Removing and Inserting Devices
1. Close any open files on the removable
device(s) that you plan to eject from
the computer.
2. Right-click on either ‘Tioman Taskbar Icon’
to display its menu.
3. Select the ‘Swap Devices’ menu. (You can
also select the ‘Properties’ menu item to
bring up the ‘Device Bay Properties’ window
where you can activate the ‘Swap Devices’
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
button from the ‘Bay 1’ or ‘Bay 2’ property
sheets or you can simply double-click either
‘TaskBar Icon’ to bring up the ‘Device Bay
Properties’ window)
4. The ‘Agate Tioman’ window will pop up and
display the following message: It is now
safe to remove and insert devices
in either Multi-function Bay.
After you have completed device
swapping, click the OK button.”
5. You can now safely remove both devices from
both bays or one device from either bay without damage to the computer or the device(s).
6. References to both devices’ drive letters listed
under ‘My Computer’ and ‘Windows Explorer’
will automatically be removed even if you only
removed one device.
POINT
The A: drive letter will never be removed
from the “My Computer” and “Windows
Explorer” folders, because the floppy
drive is not considered a removable
device by Windows.
7. The ‘Taskbar Icons’ will display a blue and
white bar which indicates that you should
remove a device or devices if you haven’t
already, and the ‘ToolTip Balloons’ will be
changed to read ‘Remove xxx in bay’ where
xxx refers to the device(s) you should
be removing. Note: Tioman does not require
that you actually remove a device or devices
when the Taskbar Icons are marked with a blue
and white bar. If you change your mind you
can continue by pressing the ‘OK’ button.
8. You can now safely insert new devices into
both bays or one device into either bay without damage to the computer or the device(s)
as long as you have not pressed the ‘OK’
button at this point.
9. Press the ‘OK’ button to continue.
61
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 62
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
10. The software will automatically detect the
new devices and place them online.
Note: The software will always re-detect both
devices even if you only swapped one device or
you decided not to swap any devices at all.
11. All drive letters associated with both devices
will be re-created and listed under ‘My
Computer’ and ‘Windows Explorer’.
12. The ‘Taskbar Icons’ and ‘ToolTip Balloons’
will be updated to reflect the new devices
inserted in the bays.
If you happen to press the ‘OK’ button before
inserting a device into Multi-function Bay 1,
Tioman will display the following message:
No device detected in Bay 1.
Please insert a device before
clicking the Continue button.
You must insert a device into Multi-function
Bay 1 to continue at this point. If you choose
to cancel the warning message, Tioman will
prompt you to insert a device in Multi-function
Bay 1 the next time the ‘Swap Devices’
command is run.
62
CAUTION
Make sure whenever you use Agate
Tiomon Hot-Swap software that you
always have at least one battery installed
in either Multi-function Bay of your
E Series notebook when you are running
on battery power alone. If you swap the
Primary Battery without having a
Secondary Battery installed in the other
Multi-function Bay, the system will lose
power once the Primary Battery is
removed when you are running on battery
power alone. It is always safe to hot-swap
your E Series Bay Devices when you are
powering the system with the AC adapter.
CAUTION
Due to the implementation, design and
configuration of the Second Hard Drive
and SuperDisk 120 Drive they have hotswap limitations when the system is
booted with these devices installed in
either Multi-function Bay. Please consult
the documentation that comes with your
Optional SuperDisk 120 Drive and/or
Optional Second 5.0GB hard drive for
specific information on how to properly
configure and use these devices with
Agate Tioman software.
POINT
CAUTION
You should never leave your Multi-function Bays empty when the notebook is in
operation. The Weight Saver is intended
to occupy Multi-function Bay 2 when no
other device is needed.
If the CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, 2nd Hard
Drive and Zip Drive are swapped into the
system simultaneously with the Floppy
Disk Drive, the Multi-function Bay 2
devices will always take the D: drive
letter designation in ‘My Computer’
and ‘Windows Explorer’.
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 63
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
POINT
If the CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, 2nd Hard
Drive and Zip Drive are swapped into the
system simultaneously with the SuperDisk
120 Drive, the Multi-function Bay 2
devices will take the D: or E: drive letter
designation in ‘My Computer’ and
‘Windows Explorer’ depending on the
order in which you inserted them along
with the SuperDisk 120 drive. Please
consult the documentation that comes
with your Optional SuperDisk 120 Drive
for specific information on how to properly configure and use the device with
Agate Tioman software.
Device Bay
Tioman adds a Control Panel application called
‘Device Bay’ to your system. You can use this
program as an alternative way to hot-swap
devices in both bays (See the ‘Removing and
Inserting Devices’ section) and display information about the devices inserted in the bays.
Your
LifeBook
E
Series
The ‘Bay Information’ section tells you whether
or not hot-swapping is supported with the
current device inserted in the bay as well as
which IDE channel the device is attached to
if any. The ‘Drive Information’ section gives a
descriptive name of the current device inserted
in the bay, its device type, state and designated
drive letters if any.
Use the following table as a guide to identify
what Drive Information is associated with your
Multi-function Bay devices:
POINT
The Weight Saver device for Multi-function Bay 2 is a plastic mold which occupies the bay when another device is not
needed. Because the Weight Saver is not
an electronic device, Tioman cannot display a ‘Device Type’ or ‘Device State’ for
it. Since Tioman cannot tell the difference
between a Weight Saver being present or
not being present, it indicates ‘No device
inserted’ under Drive Information.
DEVICE
Descriptive Name
Device Type
Device State
Drive letters
Floppy Disk Drive
Generic NEC Floppy Disk
Diskette Drive
Normal
A:
Battery
Generic Battery
Battery
Normal
None
CD-ROM
Matshita UJDA150
CD-ROM Drive
Normal
D: or E:
DVD-ROM
Matshita DVD-ROM SR-8171
CD-ROM Drive
Normal
D: or E:
2nd Hard Drive
Hitachi_DK227A-50
Hard Drive
Normal
D: or E:
Weight Saver
No device inserted
None
None
None
63
Three
Using
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 64
S e c t i o n
T h r e e
POINT
Since the Battery is a type of notebook
power adapter it has no drive letter
designation.
POINT
Due to the special design of the
SuperDisk 120 Drive it can be configured
as a removable device as well as a standard bootable floppy drive. Because of
this unique configuration the ‘Device
Type’ and drive letter designations for
the SuperDisk 120 drive are variable.
Please consult the documentation that
comes with your Optional SuperDisk 120
Drive for specific information on how to
properly configure and use the device
with Agate Tioman software.
POINT
Due to the special design and configuration of the Iomega Zip 100 drive the
‘Device Type’ may vary. Please consult
the documentation that comes with
your Optional Iomega Zip 100 drive
for specific information on how to
properly configure and use the device
with Agate Tioman software.
Uninstalling Tioman
1. Open the Control Panel folder located under
‘My Computer’.
2. Open the ‘Add/Remove Programs’ icon.
3. Select the ‘Agate Tioman for Fujitsu’ entry
from the list of currently installed programs.
4. Click on the Add/Remove button to launch
the uninstall application.
5. The setup wizard will guide you through the
rest of the uninstall process.
6. Tioman software will be removed completely,
the next time Windows is started.
64
PHOENIX NOTEDOCK FOR
WINDOWS NT 4.0
Phoenix NoteDock for NT allows you to hotdock and hot-swap devices with your LifeBook
E Series notebook when using the Windows NT
4.0 operating system.
DATA SECURITY
Your LifeBook E Series has a built-in hardware
control password security feature that allows
you to protect the data stored in the notebook
from unauthorized access. Your operating system and some applications have software control password security features that allow you to
protect all or portions of the data stored in the
notebook from unauthorized access.
Hardware Data Security Features
When you are using your notebook built-in
hardware control password to gain access to the
notebook the actual password will not appear
on the screen. This is a safety precaution. The
hardware control security parameters are set
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 65
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Using
Software Data Security Features
The operating system and some applications
have security features that are independent of
the built-in hardware protection features that
are controlled from the BIOS. See your software
documentation for more information about
these features.
LifeBook
E
Series
CAUTION
Software security feature passwords may
not be the same as the hardware security
passwords. Be sure you know which
features are controlled from software and
which from hardware or you may lock
yourself out of your own data or lock
up your hardware and not be able to
operate your notebook.
Three
from the BIOS setup utility. (See Security Menu
on pages 101-106 for more information on setting
and clearing passwords and enabling and
disabling built-in security features.)
Your
CAUTION
Make sure you memorize your passwords, both hardware and software.
If you forget, you may not be able to use
the notebook, and you will have to contact your service provider and arrange to
have them reset the hardware system
password. See your software documentation for what to do if you forget your
software security password(s).
65
F Three Using.qxd 10/28/98 10:15 AM Page 66
S e c t i o n
66
T h r e e
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 67
S e c t i o n
Configuring Your LifeBook E Series
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Identifying the Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BIOS Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Navigating Through the Setup Utility . . . . . 71
Main Menu – Setting Standard
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Advanced Menu – Setting Device
Feature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Security Menu – Setting the
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Power Menu – Setting Power
Management Feature Controls . . . . .
107
Boot Menu – Selecting the
Operating System Source . . . . . . . . . 115
Info Menu – Displaying Basic
System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Exit Menu – Leaving the Setup Utility . . . . 121
Setting Up Your Save-To-Disk
File Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
F o u r
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 68
S e c t i o n
F o u r
SECTION FOUR
CONFIGURING YOUR LIFEBOOK
E SERIES FROM FUJITSU
This section explains the BIOS setup utility.
The BIOS setup utility is required to set the
date, time, power management modes, data
security passwords and other operating
parameters of your notebook.
BOOT SEQUENCE
Each time you power up or restart your
LifeBook E Series, it goes through a quiet boot
sequence that displays a Fujitsu logo until your
operating system is loaded. During quiet boot,
your notebook is performing a standard boot
sequence including a Power On Self Test
(POST). To access the ability to change the
drive that will be used for finding the operating
system, press the Esc key anytime while the
Fujitsu logo is displayed. To enter the BIOS
setup utility press the F2 key anytime while
the Fujitsu logo is displayed. When the boot
sequence is completed without a failure and
without a request for the setup utility, the
68
system displays the operating system's opening
screen. The boot sequence is executed when:
■
You turn on power to the system using the
power switch on the right side panel of your
notebook. (Figure 2-4 on page 16.)
■
You restart your computer from the
Windows Shut Down dialog box of the
Start Menu.
■
The software initiates a system restart.
Example: When you install a new
application.
■
You reset the system by pressing the three
keys Ctrl+Alt+Del at the same time and then
restart your computer from the Windows
Shut Down dialog box.
POINT
The BIOS setup utility is entered by
pressing the F2 key during the boot
process while the Fujitsu logo is on
the screen.
POINT
When error messages occur see
Section Six, pages 151-176, for help
in understanding the meaning and
required actions to be taken.
IDENTIFYING THE DRIVES
Your notebook uses drive letters (Example A:,
B:, C:, D:, E:) to identify internal and external
devices such as hard drives, floppy disk drives,
CD-ROM drives and PC Cards. The most commonly assigned drive designators are listed
below. If you add other devices, the drive designators may be different. See your operating
system manual for setting drive designations.
Drive Designators
A: Floppy disk drive or SuperDisk 120 Drive.
Installable in multi-function bay 1 only, or
use the external floppy disk drive.
B: This designator may be assigned to the
SuperDisk 120 Drive.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 69
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
A bootable CD-ROM may have either a
floppy disk format or a hard drive format.
When using a bootable CD-ROM, drive
designations will automatically change
according to which format is used.
(See page 68 for more information.)
D: CD/DVD-ROM drive or optional second
hard drive. Installable in Multi-function
Bay 2 of your notebook.
POINT
Due to the special design of the
SuperDisk 120 Drive it can be configured
as a removable device as well as a standard bootable floppy drive. Because of
this unique configuration the drive letter
designations for the SuperDisk 120 Drive
are variable. Please consult the documentation that comes with your
Optional SuperDisk 120 drive for specific
information on how to properly configure and use the device.
■
Power Management parameters that help to
conserve your notebook’s battery life.
■
System Data Security feature parameters,
such as passwords.
CAUTION
You will only have to change the utility settings
if you want to:
■
Change the date or time. (You can also
do this without entering the setup utility,
through your operating system. See your
operating system manual.)
■
Change the primary boot device.
■
Change the power management
parameter settings.
■
Change a port address or other parameter.
■
Change an audio parameter setting.
■
Change the selection of whether to use the
built-in display, an external monitor or both.
(For a more convenient process, see the Fn key
on page 37.)
■
Change the system data security settings.
BIOS SETUP UTILITY
The BIOS setup utility is a program that sets
the operating environment for your notebook.
It is referred to in this publication as the setup
utility. There is no need to set or change the
environment to operate as it is set at the factory
for normal operating conditions.
The setup utility configures:
■
Standard system parameters, such as
date and time.
■
Device control feature parameters, such as
I/O addresses and boot devices.
Four
C: Hard drive.
Installed inside your notebook.
69
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 70
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Routinely Entering the Setup Utility
You can enter the setup utility whenever you
turn on or reset the system. To do this:
1. Allow the system to start booting.
2. As soon as the Fujitsu logo appears on the
screen, press the F2 key.
3. The Main menu of the setup utility then
appears with the current settings of the
parameters displayed.
4. If you wish to go to one of the other setup
menus, press the Ó or the È key to find the
menu you require.
POINT
If your data security settings require it,
you may be asked for a password before
the Main menu will appear.
Entering the Setup Utility After a
Configuration Change or System Failure
If there has been a change in the system configuration that does not agree with the parameter
settings stored in your BIOS memory, or there
is a failure in the system, the system beeps
and/or displays an error message after the
Power On Self Test (POST). If the failure is
not too severe, it will give you the opportunity
to modify the settings of the setup utility, as
described in the following steps:
1. When you turn on or restart the computer
there is a beep and/or the following message
appears on the screen:
Error message - please run
SETUP program
Press <F1> key to continue,
<F2> to run SETUP
2. If an error message is displayed on the
screen, and you want to continue with the
boot process and start the operating system
anyway, press the F1 key.
70
CAUTION
If your notebook beeps a series of
beeps that sounds like a code and
the display is blank, please refer to
the Troubleshooting Section. The
Troubleshooting Section includes
a list of error messages and their
meanings. (See pages 151-169.)
POINT
If your data security settings require it,
you may be asked for a password before
the operating system will be opened.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 71
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
4. When the setup utility starts with a fault present, the system displays the following message:
1. To select a menu, use the cursor keys: Ó , È.
2. To select a field within a menu or a
submenu, use the cursor keys: Õ, Ô.
Error message
3. To select the different values for each field,
press the Spacebar or + to change to the next
higher selection and F5 or - to go to the next
lower selection.
[Continue]
4. To activate a submenu press the Enter key.
Warning!
5. Press any key to enter the setup utility. The
system will then display the Main Menu with
current parameters values.
NAVIGATING THROUGH
THE SETUP UTILITY
The BIOS setup utility consists of seven menus;
MAIN, ADVANCED, SECURITY, POWER
SAVINGS, BOOT and EXIT. The remainder
of Section Three explains each menu in turn
including all submenus and setup items.
The following procedures allow you to navigate
the setup utility menus:
5. To return to a menu from a submenu, press
the Esc key.
6. To go to the Exit menu from any other
menu, press the Esc key.
POINT
Selecting a field causes a help message
about that field to be displayed on the
right-hand side of the screen
POINT
Pressing the Enter key with the highlight
on a selection that is not a submenu or
auto selection will cause a list of all options
for that item to be displayed. Pressing the
Enter key or Esc key will select the highlighted choice and remove the list.
7.Pressing the F9 key resets all items in the
current menu to the default values.
Four
3. If an error message is displayed on the
screen, and you want to enter the setup
utility, press the F2 key.
8. Pressing the F10 key saves the current
configuration and exits the BIOS Setup
Utility. You will be asked to verify this
selection before it is executed.
9. Pressing the F1 key gives you a general
help screen.
POINT
The BIOS Setup screens depicted in this
manual are only representations of the
actual setup screens. The BIOS Setup
screens on your notebook may vary.
71
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 72
S e c t i o n
F o u r
MAIN MENU – SETTING
STANDARD SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Main
The Main Menu allows you to set or view the
current system parameters. Follow the instructions for Navigating Through The Setup Utility
to make any changes. (See page 71.)
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power
Boot
Info
Exit
Item Specific Help
System Time:
System Date:
[14:57:01]
[08/10/1998]
Legacy Diskette A:
[1.44/1.25 MB 31/2"]
▲ ▲ ▲
Primary Master
Secondary Master
Secondary Slave
[FUJITSU MHD2032AT]
[UJDA150]
[LS-120 SLIM 01]
System Memory:
Extended Memory:
Memory Cache
640 KB
31 MB
▲
Table 4-1 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Main menu, all of the options for each
field, the default settings and a description of
the field’s function and any special information
needed to help understand the field’s use.
Advanced
Language:
[English (US)]
<Tab>, <Shift-Tab>, or
<Enter> selects field.
POINT
72
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
System Time and System Date can
also be set from your operating system
without using the setup utility. Use the
calendar and time icon on your Windows
Control panel or type time or date from
the MS-DOS prompt.
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-1 Main Menu
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 73
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Table 4-1 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Main Menu
Menu Field
Options
System Time:
—
Default
—
Description
Sets and displays the current time. Time is in a 24 hour format
of hours:minutes:seconds with 2 digits for each. (HH:MM:SS).
Example: 16:45:57. You may change each segment of the time
separately. Move between the segments with the Tab key and/or
Shift + Tab keys.
System Date:
—
—
Sets and displays the current date. Date is in a month/day/year
numeric format with 2 digits each for month and day and 4 digits
for year. (MM/DD/YYYY) for example: 03/20/1998. You may
change each segment of the date separately. Move between the
segments with the Tab key and/or Shift + Tab keys.
Legacy Diskette A:
1.44/1.25 MB 3½"; Disabled.
[1.44/1.25 MB 3½"]
Sets the format for floppy disk drive A if it is installed.
Primary Master:
Selects Primary
Master submenu.
Display the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface, if there is
one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Primary Master submenu
allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.
Secondary Master:
Selects Secondary
Master submenu.
Display the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface, if there is
one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Secondaryj Master submenu
allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.
73
Four
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 74
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-1 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Main Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Secondary Slave:
[UJDA110]
Display the type of device on this ATA/ATAPI interface, if there is
one. Pressing the Enter key selects the Primary Slave submenu
allowing additional device configuration options for this interface.
System Memory:
640 KB
Displays the size of system memory, which is detected
automatically and cannot be changed by the setup utility.
Extended Memory:
31 MB
Displays the size of extended memory which is detected
automatically and cannot be changed by the setup utility.
Selects Secondary
Slave submenu.
Memory Cache:
Selects the memory
cache submenu.
—
Allows you to set your system to use external memory cache.
Language:
English (US); Japanese (JP).
[English (US)]
The default setting differs between the US/European
and the Japanese model. Selects the display language for the BIOS.
74
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 75
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Table 4-2 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Primary Master submenu, all of the
options for each field, the default settings and
a description of the field’s function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field’s use.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Primary Master [FUJITSU MHD2032AT]
Type:
Cylinders:
Heads:
Sectors:
Maximum Capacity:
[Auto]
[6300]
[16]
[63]
3253 MB
Multi-Sector Transfers:
LBA Mode Control:
Transfer Mode:
Ultra DMA Mode:
[16 Sectors]
[Enabled]
[Fast PIO 4 / DMA]
[Mode 2]
Select Item
Select Menu
User = you enter
parameters of hard-disk
drive installed at this
connection.
Auto = autotypes
ATA/ATAPI drive
installed here.
CD-ROM = a CD-ROM
drive is installed here.
ATAPI Removable =
removable disk drive is
installed here.
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Item Specific Help
Four
Primary Master – Submenu
The Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave
submenus are identical for hard drives. They
have the capacity displayed at the top of the
screen as well as on Main menu. Follow the
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup
Utility to make any changes. (See page 71.)
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-2 Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave Submenus
75
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 76
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-2 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave Submenus
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Type:
Auto; None; CD-ROM;
ATAPI Removable; User.
ATAPI Removable 2
[Auto]
Selects the ATA/ATAPI device type. Select Auto to have the type
automatically identified by the BIOS at POST. If None is selected,
all of the following Set-up items do not appear. Select CD-ROM
if a CD-ROM drive is installed at this connection. If User is
selected, you must specify the number of Cylinders, Heads,
and Sectors for the drive. Select ATAPI Removable if a removable
disk drive is installed at this connection.
Cylinders:
A number between 0
and 65,535.
This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is
identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,
you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing
(pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.
Heads:
A number between 1 and 16.
This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is
identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,
you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing
(pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.
Sectors:
A number between 0 and 63.
This item appears only when Auto is selected and the type is
identified as hard disk, or User is selected. When User is selected,
you can change the value. This field is changed by incrementing
(pressing the Spacebar) or by typing in the number.
76
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 77
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Maximum Capacity:
Display only.
—
Displays the maximum capacity of the drive calculated from the
parameters of the hard disk when Auto is selected and the type
is identified as hard disk, or User is selected.
Multi-Sector Transfers:
Disabled; 2; 4; 8; 16.
MAX 32; MAX 64; MAX 128.
—
This option cannot be changed when Auto is selected. Specify the
number of sectors per block for multiple sector transfer. MAX
refers to the size the disk returns when required.
LBA Mode Control:
Enabled; Disabled.
—
Enables or disables logical Block Addressing in place of Cylinder,
Head, Sector addressing. This option cannot be changed when
Auto is selected.
Transfer Mode:
Standard, Fast PIO 1; Fast PIO 2 —
Fast PIO 3; Fast PIO 4;
Fast PIO 3 / DMA;
Fast PIO 4 / DMA.
Selects the method for moving data to/from the drive. Autotype
the drive to select the optimum transfer mode. This option
cannot be changed when Auto is selected. Multi-word DMA
is automatically set to mode 1 for Fast PIO 1, Fast PIO 2,
Fast PIO 3, and set to mode 2 for Fast PIO 4 / DMA.
Ultra DMA Mode:
Disabled; Mode 0;
Mode 1; Mode 2.
Selects the method for moving data to/from the drive. Autotype
the drive to select the optimum transfer mode. This option
cannot be changed when Auto is selected.
—
77
Four
Table 4-2 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Primary Master, Secondary Master/Slave Submenus
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 78
S e c t i o n
F o u r
CAUTION
A bootable CD-ROM may have either
a floppy disk format or a hard drive
format. When the bootable CD-ROM
is used the drive allocations change
automatically without changing the
BIOS setup. If a floppy disk format CDROM is used the CD-ROM becomes
Drive A. The CD-ROM will only take
drive C: (hard drive format)
if the internal hard drive is not present
or is disabled. The bootable CD-ROM
can never use a C: designation if a
formatted internal hard drive is present
since the C: designator is always reserved
for the internal hard drive.The boot
sequence ignores the new drive designations, however, your application software
will use the new designations.
78
CAUTION
Be careful of the operating environment
when booting from a CD-ROM or you
may overwrite files by mistake.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 79
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Memory Cache – Submenu
The Memory Cache submenu provides the
ability to enable or disable external cache
memory for your processor. Follow the instructions for Navigating Through the Setup Utility
to make any changes. (See page 71.)
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Main
Memory Cache
External Cache:
Item Specific Help
[Enabled]
Enables external cache.
Four
Table 4-3 shows the names of the menu fields for
the Memory Cache submenu, all the options for
each field, the default settings and a description
of the field’s function and any special information needed to help understand the field’s use.
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-3 Memory Cache Submenu of the Main Menu
79
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 80
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-3 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Memory Cache Submenu
Menu Field
External Cache:
Options
Enabled; Disabled.
Exiting from the Main Menu
When you have finished setting the parameters
on this menu, you can either exit from the
setup utility, or move to another menu. If you
wish to exit from the setup utility, press the
Esc key or use the cursor keys to go to the
Exit menu. If you wish to move to another
menu, use the cursor keys. (See Navigating
Through the Setup Utility on page 57 for
more information.)
80
Default
[Enabled]
Description
Turns external memory cache on and off.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 81
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
ADVANCED MENU – SETTING
DEVICE FEATURE CONTROLS
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power
Boot
Info
The Advanced Menu allows you to:
■
Set the communication mode for the
parallel port.
■
Set an audio function I/O address, interrupt
level and DMA channel.
■
Select between the display panel and an
external CRT display.
■
Enable or disable compensation for
your display.
DMI Event Logging
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Select Item
Select Menu
[Yes]
[No]
Select 'Yes' if you
are using a Plug &
Play capable
operating system.
Select 'No' if you
need the BIOS to
configure non-boot
devices.
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
Configure PCI devices in your system.
I/O Device Configuration
Keyboard/Mouse Features
Multimedia Device Configuration
Video Features
PCI Configuration
▲
Set the I/O addresses for the serial and
parallel ports.
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
■
■
Item Specific Help
Plug & Play O/S:
Secured Setup Configurations:
Enable or disable support for Plug & Play
operating systems.
Four
■
Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-4 Advanced Menu
Follow the instructions for Navigating
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.
(See page 71.)
Table 4-4 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Advanced Menu, all of the options for
each field, the default settings and a description
of the field’s function and any special information needed to help understand the field’s use.
81
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 82
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-4 Field Names, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Plug & Play O/S:
Yes; No.
[Yes]
Select Yes if you are using a Plug & Play capable operating system.
Select No if you need the BIOS to configure non-boot devices.
Secure Setup
Configuration:
Yes; No.
[No]
Yes prevents a Plug & Play operating system from changing
system settings.
I/O Device
Configuration:
When selected, opens the I/O Device Configuration submenu
which allows the user to modify settings for parallel and serial
ports, the floppy disk controller, and the local bus IDE adapter.
Keyboard/Mouse Features:
When selected, opens the Keyboard/Mouse Features submenu,
which allows setting external and internal keyboard and
mouse parameters.
Multimedia Device
Configuration:
When selected, opens the Multimedia Device Configuration
submenu, which allows setting the hardware address and
interrupt levels of audio functions and enabling or disabling
the MIDI/joystick port.
Video Features:
When selected, opens the Video Features submenu, which allow
setting of the display parameters, including routing of video
signals to different displays.
82
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 83
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Description
PCI Configuration:
When selected, opens additional menus to configure PCI devices.
DMI Event Logging:
When selected, opens the DMI event logging configuration menu.
Four
Table 4-4 Field Names, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
83
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 84
S e c t i o n
F o u r
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
CAUTION
I/O addresses, DMA channels and
Interrupt levels can be entered in various
ways, including via the BIOS setup utility,
the control software for the I/O device, or
the hardware. If any two ports or devices,
serial or parallel, have the same I/O
address assigned your notebook will not
function normally. Please keep a record
of original settings before making any
changes in the event that a restoration is
required. See your hardware and software
documentation as well as the setup utility
to determine settings, limitations, etc.
84
I/O Device Configuration
Serial port A:
Base I/O address:
Interrupt:
Serial port B:
Mode:
Base I/O address:
Interrupt:
Base I/O address:
DMA channel:
Parallel port:
Mode:
Base I/O address:
Interrupt:
Floppy disk controller:
Local Bus IDE adapter:
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Select Item
Select Menu
Item Specific Help
[Enabled]
[3F8]
[IRQ 4]
[Enabled]
[FIR]
[2E8]
[IRQ 3]
[118]
[DMA 3]
[Enabled]
[Bi-directional]
[378]
[IRQ 7]
[Enabled]
[Both]
Configure serial port A
using options:
[Disabled]
No configuration
[Enabled]
User configuration
[Auto]
BIOS or OS chooses
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
I/O Device Configuration Submenu
of the Advanced Menu
The I/O Device Configuration submenu
provides the ability to set the I/O addresses and
interrupt levels for the parallel and serial ports,
and disk drive controllers of your notebook.
Follow the instructions for Navigating
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.
(See page 71.)
Advanced
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-5 I/O Device Configuration Submenu
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 85
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
POINT
To prevent IRQ and address conflicts,
avoid changing the default settings.
If you must change the settings, you
can call 1-800-8FUJITSU for
technical assistance.
POINT
All I/O addresses in Table 4-5 are in
hexadecimal.
CAUTION
Four
Table 4-5 shows the names of the menu fields
for the I/O Device Configuration submenu, all
of the options for each field, the default settings
and a description of the field’s function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field’s use.
The BIOS will warn you of a resource
conflict by placing a yellow asterisk next
to each device that is in conflict.
85
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 86
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Serial Port A:
Disabled; Enabled; Auto.
[Enabled]
Configures the serial port A using either no configuration
(Disabled), a user defined configuration (Enabled), or by
allowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).
Base I/O address:
3F8; 2F8; 3E8; 2E8.
[3F8]
Allows user to set the serial port base I/O address when port
A is Enabled.
Interrupt:
IRQ 3; IRQ 4;
IRQ 10; IRQ 11.
[IRQ 4]
Allows user to set the serial port interrupt when port A
is Enabled.
Serial Port B:
Disabled; Enabled; Auto.
[Enabled]
Configures the serial port B using either no configuration
(Disabled), a user defined configuration (Enabled), or by
allowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).
Mode:
IrDA; FIR.
[FIR]
Allows user to set the serial port mode when port B is Enabled.
Base I/O address:
3F8; 2F8; 3E8; 2E8.
[2E8]
Allows user to set the serial port base I/O address when port B
is Enabled.
86
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 87
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Table 4-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Options
Default
Description
Interrupt:
IRQ 3; IRQ 4;
IRQ 10; IRQ 11.
[IRQ 3]
Allows user to set the serial port interrupt when port B
is Enabled.
Base I/O address:
100; 108; 110; 118.
[118]
When the mode for serial port B is set to FIR, this option is
available allowing the user to set the base I/O address for the
FIR of serial port B.
DMA channel:
DMA 1; DMA 3.
[DMA 3]
When the mode for serial port B is set to FIR, this option is
available allowing the user to set the DMA channel for the
FIR of serial port B.
Parallel port:
Disabled; Enabled; Auto.
[Enabled]
Configures the parallel port using either no configuration
(Disabled), a user defined configuration (Enabled), or by
allowing the BIOS or OS to choose the configuration (Auto).
Mode:
Output Only;
Bi-directional; ECP.
[Bi-directional]
When the parallel port is enabled this option is available allowing
the user to set the mode for the parallel port. Bi-directional allows
two-way transfer of information between your notebook and a
connected parallel device. Output Only (Half Duplex) allows
information to be transferred in only one direction, from your
notebook to the printer or similar device. ECP Mode allows
communication with the ECP class of parallel I/O devices.
Four
Menu Field
87
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 88
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-5 Fields, Options and Defaults for the I/O Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Base I/O address:
378; 278; 3BC.
[378]
Allows user to set the parallel port base I/O address when the
parallel port is Enabled.
Interrupt:
IRQ 5; IRQ 7.
[IRQ 7]
Allows user to set the parallel port interrupt when the parallel
port is Enabled.
Floppy disk controller:
Disabled; Enabled; Auto.
[Enabled]
Enables and disables the floppy disk drive controller for both
multi-function bays and the external floppy disk drive port.
When Auto is selected, allows the BIOS to choose the
configuration for the controller.
Local Bus
IDE adapter:
Both; Disabled;
Primary; Secondary.
[Both]
Enables and disables the integrated local bus IDE adapter.
88
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 89
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Table 4-6 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Keyboard/Mouse submenu, all of the
options for each field, the default settings and
a description of the field’s function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field’s use.
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Exit
Item Specific Help
Keyboard/Mouse Features
Numlock:
[Auto]
Hot Plug:
[Enabled]
Internal Pointing Device: [Auto Disabled]
Selects Power-on state
for Numlock.
Four
Keyboard/Mouse Features Submenu
The Keyboard/Mouse Features submenu is for
setting the parameters of the integrated and
external mouse and keyboard. Follow the
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup
Utility to make any changes. (See page 71.)
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-6 Keyboard/Mouse Features Submenu
89
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 90
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-6 Fields, Options and Defaults of the Keyboard/Mouse Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Numlock:
Auto; Off; On.
[Auto]
Sets the NumLock function state when the computer
completes booting.
Hot Plug:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Enabled]
Enables and disables the ability to plug a mouse or keyboard into
the PS/2 port and have it immediately recognized and active.
Internal Pointing Device:
Auto Disabled;
Always Enabled.
[Auto Disabled]
Sets the device controlling the mouse cursor on the screen. Always
Enabled makes the pointing device always enabled whether
there is an external mouse or not. Auto Disabled makes the
pointing device turn off when an external pointing device is
connected to the PS/2 port.
90
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:20 AM Page 91
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Table 4-7 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Multimedia Device Configuration
submenu, all of the options for each field, the
default settings and a description of the field’s
function and any special information needed
to help understand the field’s use.
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Exit
Item Specific Help
Multimedia Device Configuration
Multimedia device:
Sound:
Base I/O address:
FM I/O address:
MPU I/O address:
Interrupt:
DMA channel:
DMA channel:
Joystick:
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
[220-22F]
[388-38B]
[330-331]
[IRQ 5]
[DMA 1]
[DMA 5]
[Enabled]
Configures multimedia
devices.
Four
Multimedia Device Configuration Submenu
The Multimedia Device Configuration submenu
is for setting the features of the built-in audio
functions, and enabling joystick function. Follow
the instructions for Navigating Through the
Setup Utility to make any changes. (See page 71.)
POINT
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
All I/O addresses in Table 4-7 are in
hexadecimal.
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-7 Multimedia Device Configuration Submenu
91
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 92
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-7 Fields, Options and Defaults of the Multimedia Device Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Multimedia device:
Disabled; Enabled.
[Enabled]
Enables or disables BIOS support for sound and joystick
operation. If Disabled, none of the following items will appear.
Sound:
Disabled; Enabled; Auto.
[Enabled]
Allows BIOS support for sound to be enabled or disabled. When
set to Auto, the BIOS or OS will choose the proper sound configuration settings and some of the following items will not appear.
Base I/O address:
220-22F; 240-24F;
260-26F; 280-28F.
[220-22F]
When Sound is Enabled, this option is available allowing the user
to set the I/O address for the sound device.
FM I/O address:
388-38B; 38C-38F;
390-393; 394-397.
[388-38B]
When Sound is Enabled, this option is available allowing the user
to set the base I/O address for the FM device.
MPU-I/O address:
300-301; 310-311;
320-321; 330-331.
[330-331]
When Sound is Enabled, this option is available allowing the user
to set the I/O address for the MPU device.
Interrupt:
IRQ 5; IRQ 7; IRQ 9;
IRQ 10; IRQ 11.
[IRQ 5]
When Sound is Enabled, this option is available allowing the user
to set the interrupt for the sound device.
DMA channel:
DMA 0; DMA 1;
DMA 3; DMA 5.
[DMA 1]
When Sound is Enabled, this option is available allowing the user
to set the DMA channel for the sound device.
DMA channel:
DMA 0; DMA 1;
DMA 3; DMA 5.
[DMA 5]
When Sound is Enabled, this option is available allowing the user
to set the DMA channel for the sound device.
Joystick:
Disabled; Enabled.
[Enabled]
Enables or disables BIOS support for the joystick.
92
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 93
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Video Features Submenu
The Video Features Submenu is for setting the
display parameters. Follow the instructions for
Navigating Through the Setup Utility to make
any changes. (See page 71.)
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Exit
Item Specific Help
Video Features
Display
Compensation:
[Flat-Panel]
[Disabled]
Select display
terminal.
Four
Table 4-8 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Video Features submenu, all of the
options for each field, the default settings and
a description of the field’s function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field’s use.
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-8 Video Features Submenu
93
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 94
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-8 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Video Features Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Display:
Flat-Panel; CRT;
Simultaneous.
[Flat-Panel]
Selects where the video signal will be routed.
Compensation:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
Enables or disables compensation which controls spacing on the
display. When enabled, displays with less than pixel resolution
1024 x 768 (E335, E340 and E350) or 800 x 600 (E330) will still
cover the entire screen.
94
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 95
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Exit
Item Specific Help
PCI Configuration
▲
PCI Configuration Submenu
The PCI Configuration submenu allows the
user to reserve specific interrupts (IRQs) for
legacy ISA devices, and to enable or disable
built in PCI device modules. Follow the
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup
Utility to make any changes. (See page 71.)
IRQ Reservation
Internal Modem:
Reserve specific IRQs
for use by legacy ISA
devices.
[Enabled]
Four
Table 4-9 shows the names of the menu fields
for the PCI Configuration submenu, all of the
options for each field, the default settings and
a description of the field’s function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field’s use.
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-9 PCI Configuration Submenu
95
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 96
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-9 Fields, Options and Defaults for the PCI Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
IRQ Reservation:
—
—
Accesses a submenu allowing the user to reserve specific IRQs for
use by legacy ISA devices.
Internal Modem:
Disabled; Enabled.
[Enabled]
Allows the internal modem module to be enabled or disabled.
Disabled; Enabled.
[Enabled]
Allows the internal LAN module to be enabled or disabled.
or
Internal LAN:
POINT
The BIOS setting for your communication
device is variable depending on your
LifeBook E Series Built-to-order
configuration.
96
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 97
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Exit
Item Specific Help
IRQ Reservation
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
3:
4:
5:
7:
9:
10:
11:
[Available]
[Available]
[Available]
[Available]
[Available]
[Available]
[Available]
Reserve the specified
IRQ for use by legacy
ISA devices.
Four
IRQ Reservation Submenu
of the PCI Configuration Submenu
The IRQ Reservation submenu of the PCI
Configuration submenu allows the user to mark
various IRQs as reserved for use by legacy ISA
devices. When an IRQ is reserved, the BIOS
does not use it for embedded PCI or ISA
devices. Follow the instructions for Navigating
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.
(See page 71.)
Table 4-10 shows the names of the menu fields
for the IRQ Reservation submenu of the PCI
Configuration submenu, all of the options for
each field, the default settings and a description
of the field’s function and any special information needed to help understand the field’s use.
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-10 IRQ Reservation Submenu
97
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 98
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-10 Fields, Options and Defaults for the IRQ Reservation Submenu of the of the PCI Configuration Submenu of the Advanced Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
IRQ 3:
Available; Reserved.
[Available]
Reserves IRQ 3. If Reserved is selected, the BIOS reserves IRQ 3
for use by legacy ISA devices and does not use it for embedded
PCI or ISA devices. IRQ 3 is removed from the IRQ bitmap in
the PCI IRQ routing table.
IRQ 4:
Available; Reserved.
[Available]
Reserves IRQ 4.
IRQ 5:
Available; Reserved.
[Available]
Reserves IRQ 5.
IRQ 7:
Available; Reserved.
[Available]
Reserves IRQ 7.
IRQ 9:
Available; Reserved.
[Available]
Reserves IRQ 9.
IRQ 10:
Available; Reserved.
[Available]
Reserves IRQ 10.
IRQ 11:
Available; Reserved.
[Available]
Reserves IRQ 11.
CAUTION
Only IRQ's 9, 10, & 11 can be reserved
without conflict.
98
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 99
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Table 4-11 shows the names of the menu fields
for the DMI Event Logging submenu, all the
options for each field, the default settings and
a description of the field’s function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field’s use.
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Exit
Item Specific Help
DMI Event Logging
Event log capacity:
Event log validity:
Space Available
Valid
'Yes' clears all DMI
event logs at next boot.
The value is reset to
'No' after clearing
logs.
Clear all DMI event logs: [No]
Event Logging:
System Boot Event:
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Four
DMI Event Logging Submenu
of the Advanced Menu
The DMI Event Logging Submenu is for setting
up the logs DMI event logging. Follow the
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup
Utility to make any changes. (See page 71.)
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-11 DMI Event Logging Submenu
99
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 100
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-11 Fields, options and Defaults for the DMI Event Logging Submenu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Event log capacity:
Display only.
[Space Available]
Event log validity:
Display only.
[Valid]
Clear all DMI event logs:
Yes; No.
[No]
A Yes selection causes the event logs to clear at the next boot.
Once the logs are cleared this automatically sets to No until reset
to yes by selecting yes here.
Event Logging:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Enabled]
Turns event logging on and off for all DMI events.
System Boot Event:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
Turns event logging on and off for DMI system boot events.
100
Description
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 101
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
The Security menu allows you to set up the data
security features of your notebook to fit your
operating needs and to view the current data
security configuration. Follow the instructions
for Navigating Through the Setup Utility to
make any changes. (See page 71.)
Table 4-12 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Security menu, all of the options for
each field, the default settings and a description
of the field's function and any special information needed to help understand the field's use.
The default condition is no passwords required
and no write protection.
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power
Boot
Info
Exit
Item Specific Help
Supervisor Password Is:
User Password Is:
Clear
Clear
Set Supervisor Password
Set User Password
[Enter]
[Enter]
Supervisor Password
controls access to the
setup utility.
Diskette access:
[All]
Password on boot:
[Disabled]
Power Management security: [Disabled]
Fixed disk boot sector:
[Normal]
Fixed disk security:
Primary Master:
Secondary Master:
Secondary Slave:
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Four
SECURITY MENU – SETTING
THE SECURITY FEATURES
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-12 Security Menu
101
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 102
S e c t i o n
F o u r
POINT
If you set a password, write it down and
keep it in a safe place. If you forget the
password you will have to contact your
support representative to regain access to
your secured functions and data.
POINT
If you make an error when re-entering
the password a [Warning] will be
displayed on the screen. To try again
press the Enter key and then retype the
password. Press the Esc key to abort
the password setting process.
CAUTION
Entering a password incorrectly 3 times
in a row will cause the keyboard and
mouse to be locked out and the warning
[System Disabled] to be displayed.
If this happens restart the computer by
turning off and on the power with the
power switch and use the correct
password on reboot.
102
CAUTION
If the Power Management Security is
Enabled and the Password on Boot is
Disabled you will not be able to resume
operation from the Suspend or Save-toDisk modes.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 103
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Menu Field
Supervisor Password is:
Options
—
Default
Clear
Description
A display-only field. Set is displayed when the system
supervisor password is set and Clear when it is not.
User Password is:
—
Clear
A display-only field. Set is displayed when the general user
password is set, and Clear when it is not.
Set Supervisor Password:
[Enter]
—
Sets, changes or cancels the Supervisor Password. The Supervisor
Password may be up to seven characters long and must include
only lower-case letters or numbers. To cancel a password press
the Enter key instead of entering characters in the Enter New
Password field and in the Re-enter New Password field. When
a Supervisor Password is set it must be used to access the BIOS
setup utility.
Set User Password:
[Enter]
—
(This field can only be accessed if the Supervisor Password is set.)
Sets, changes or cancels the User Password. The User Password
may be up to seven characters long and must include only lower
case letters or numbers. To cancel a password press the Enter key
instead of entering characters in the Enter New Password field and
in the Re-enter New Password field. When a User Password is set
it must be used to access the BIOS setup utility.
103
Four
Table 4-12 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 104
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-12 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu
Menu Field
Diskette access:
Options
All; Supervisor Only.
Default
[All]
Description
Sets the floppy disk access to be secured for access only with
Supervisor's password or by all users with a password. The default
is all users with a password.
Password on boot:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
When set to Enabled, a password (User or Supervisor) is required
after the Power On Self Test (POST) before the operating system
will be read from a disk. When set to Disabled no password is
required. If no Supervisor Password is set this feature is not
available and no password is required.
Power Management
Security:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
When set to Enabled, a password (User or Supervisor) is required
to resume from Suspend or Save-to-Disk mode. The password
required is the same one required by the Password on Boot function.
Fixed disk boot sector:
Normal; Write Protect.
[Normal]
Sets write protection for the sector of the boot disk which contains
the operating system. When set to Write Protect, the BIOS will
prevent any application from writing into the sector of the internal
hard drive containing the operating system. When set to Normal
there is no BIOS protection of the operating system.
104
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 105
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Table 4-12 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Security Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Primary Master:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
When set to Enabled , a password (User or Supervisor) is required
to access data on the disk drive on the Primary Master interface.
Secondary Master:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
When set to Enabled, a password (User or Supervisor) is required
to access data on the Secondary Master interface.
Secondary Slave:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
When set to Enabled , a password (User or Supervisor) is required
to access data on the disk drive on the Secondary Slave interface.
105
Four
Fixed disk security:
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 106
S e c t i o n
F o u r
POINT
Boot sector protection must be set
to [Normal] to install or upgrade an
operating system.
Exiting from the Security Menu
When you have finished setting the parameters
on the Security Menu, you can either exit from
setup utility or move to another menu. If you
wish to exit from setup utility, press the Esc key
to go to the Exit Menu. If you wish to move to
another menu, use the cursor keys.
106
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 107
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
POWER MENU –
SETTING POWER MANAGEMENT
FEATURE CONTROLS
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power
Boot
Info
Item Specific Help
Power Savings:
Hard Disk Timeout:
Video Timeout:
Idle Mode:
Standby Timeout:
Auto Suspend Timeout:
[Customized]
[Off]
[Off]
[On]
[4 Minutes]
[15 Minutes]
Table 4-13 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Power menu, all of the options for each
field, the default settings and a description of
the field's function and any special information
needed to help understand the field's use.
Suspend Mode:
Auto Save To Disk:
[Suspend]
[Off]
Resume On Modem Ring:
Resume On Time:
Resume Time:
[Off]
[Off]
[00:00:00]
▲
Select Power Management
Mode. Choosing modes
changes system power
management settings.
Maximum Power Savings
conserves the greatest
amount of system power
while Maximum
Performance conserves
power but allows
greatest system
performance. To alter
these setting, choose
Customize. To turn off
power management,
choose Disabled.
Advanced Features
POINT
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Four
The Power menu allows you to set and change
the power management parameters. Follow the
instructions for Navigating Through the Setup
Utility to make any changes.
(See page 71.)
Most power management parameters can
also be set from the Windows 95 and
Windows NT desktop without entering
the setup utility, using PowerPanel by
Phoenix Technologies. Changing the settings with PowerPanel does not change
what is stored in the CMOS memory.
Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-13 Power Menu
POINT
In Windows 98 Auto-suspend Timeout,
Hard Disk Timeout, and Video Timeout
features are available exclusively through
the operating system.
107
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 108
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-13 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.
Menu Field
Power Savings:
Options
Customized; Maximum
Performance; Maximum
Power Savings, Disabled.
Default
[Customized]
Description
Sets the power savings parameters to a factory installed
combination of parameters, a custom set of parameters set by you
or no power saving features.
Hard Disk Timeout:
30 seconds to
20 minutes; Off.
[Off]
Sets the length of time that the hard drive can be inactive before
your notebook automatically turns off the power to the hard drive
controller and drive motor. If you choose a factory installed
combination of parameters this field will display the setting. If
you choose to customize the parameters you will be able to set
this yourself. The options available vary from Off, which has no
inactivity shutoff, to 20 minutes.
Video Timeout:
2 minutes to
20 minutes; Off.
[Off]
Sets the length of time without any user input device activity
before the display is turned off. If you choose a factory combination
of parameters, this field will display the setting. If you choose to
customize the parameters, you will be able to set this yourself. Off
has no inactivity shutoff.
Idle Mode:
On; Off.
[On]
Turns on and off the slow down of the CPU during periods of
inactivity. When this is turned on the CPU clock slows by the
amount set in the Advanced submenu when there is no activity
for 16 seconds or more. Normal speed resumes automatically as
soon as there is any activity.
108
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 109
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Standby Timeout:
1 minute to
16 minutes; Off.
[4 Minutes]
Sets the length of time without any user input device activity
before the CPU is set to half speed and the display and the hard
drive are turned off. If you choose a factory combination of
parameters this field will display the setting. If you choose to
customize the parameters you will be able to set this yourself.
Auto Suspend Timeout:
5 to 60 minutes; Off.
[15 Minutes]
Sets the length of time without any I/O activity before your not
book goes into Suspend mode. If you choose a factory combination
of parameters this field will display that setting. If you choose to
customize the parameters you will be able to set this yourself. Off
has no inactivity suspension.
Suspend Mode:
Suspend; Save-to-Disk.
[Suspend]
Sets the form of suspension state. If you choose Suspend, you will
suspend operation with power to system memory, and everything
else powered down or in a very low power state. If you choose
Save-to-Disk your notebook will save all of system memory and
the operating parameters to the hard drive before turning your
notebook to the pseudo-off condition.
109
Four
Table 4-13 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 110
S e c t i o n
F o u r
POINT
When resuming from a Save-to-Disk
suspension there will be a delay while
the contents of system memory and
operating parameters are loaded from
the hard drive.
110
CAUTION
In Save-to-Disk mode there is no
indication on the Status Indicator to let
you know you are suspended rather than
shut off from the power switch. You may
want to make a habit of always trying
the Suspend/Resume button before using
the power switch.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 111
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Menu Field
Auto Save to Disk:
Options
Off; After 1 Hour.
Default
[Off]
Description
When set to After 1 Hour your notebook will automatically
save all of system memory and the operating parameters to the
hard drive and go to the pseudo-off if you leave your notebook in
Suspend mode for an hour.
Resume On
Modem Ring:
On; Off.
[Off]
Sets whether or not to Resume from a suspension state when a
message is received by telephone line. This feature is not available
if the Save-to-Disk mode is enabled. This feature applies to internal,
external and PC Card modems.
Resume On Time:
On; Off.
[Off]
Sets whether or not to resume from a suspension state at a
designated time. This feature is available from either the Suspend
mode or the Save-to-Disk mode.
Resume Time:
–
–
Sets the designated time, on a 24-hour clock, when the notebook
is to automatically resume operation from the Suspend state.
The format of the clock setting is hours:minutes:seconds. Each
segment of the time is set separately, either by incrementing or by
typing in the numbers. You move between the segments with the
Tab key or the Shift+Tab keys. This only applies when Resume on
Time is set to On.
CAUTION
Wake on Modem ring when enabled will
draw power from the bridge battery alone
when your system is running off battery
power. This may potentially drain your
bridge battery. Disabling Wake on Modem
ring will prevent this from happening.
111
Four
Table 4-13 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 112
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-13 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Power Menu.
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Advanced Features:
–
–
When selected, opens the Advanced Features submenu which
allows setting additional power saving parameters.
Factory Installed Values for Power Saving Profiles
Hard Disk Timeout
Video Timeout
Idle Mode
Standby Timeout
Auto Suspend Timeout
Customized:
Off
Off
On
4 Minutes
15 Minutes
Maximum
Power Savings:
30 Seconds
2 Minutes
On
1 Minute
5 Minutes
Maximum
Performance:
Off
Off
Off
Off
15 Minutes
Disabled:
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1 Minute
On
1 Minute
5 Minutes
Sample Customized Profile: 2 Minutes
(To get even better battery
life keep the display and volume
settings as low as possible and
use the sample customized profile.)
112
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 113
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Table 4-14 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Video Features submenu, all of the
options for each field, the default settings and
a description of the field's function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field's use.
Advanced Features
SUS/RES Switch:
Lid Closure Suspend:
Lid Open Resume:
APM CPU Idle Mode:
Serial Mouse Activity:
Item Specific Help
[Enabled]
[On]
[On]
[Low Power]
[Disabled]
Set the SUS/RES Switch.
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
Exiting from the Power Menu
When you have finished setting the parameters
on the Power menu, you can either exit from the
Setup utility or move to another menu. If you
wish to exit from Setup utility press the Esc key
to go to the Exit menu. If you wish to move to
another menu, use the cursor keys.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Power
Four
Advanced Features
Submenu of the Power Menu
The Advanced Features submenu is for setting
some non-time related power saving parameters. Follow the instructions for Navigating
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.
(See page 71.)
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-14 Advanced Features Submenu
113
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 114
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-14 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Advanced Features Submenu of the Power Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
SUS/RES Switch:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Enabled]
Sets the function of the Suspend/Resume button when your
notebook is in an active state. The resume function can not
be disabled as it works regardless of any other settings.
Lid Closure Suspend:
On; Off.
[On]
Enables and disables having closure of the Display panel put your
notebook in Suspend mode.
Lid Open Resume:
On; Off.
[On]
Enables and disables having opening the Display panel acting as
an automatic resume.
APM CPU Idle Mode:
Low Power; Standard.
[Low Power]
Sets the CPU speed during Idle mode.
Serial Mouse Activity:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
Enables and disables having activity on the serial port cause the
system to reactivate from inactivity timeouts.
114
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 115
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
BOOT MENU – SELECTING THE
OPERATING SYSTEM SOURCE
Main
The Boot Menu is used to select the order
in which the BIOS searches sources for the
operating system.
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Boot
Item Specific Help
QuickBoot Mode:
Boot-time Diagnostic Screen:
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Preboot Execution Envionment:
Boot Device Priority
[Disabled]
Allows the system to
skip certain tests
while booting. This
will decrease the
time needed to boot
the system.
Four
▲
Table 4-15 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Boot menu, all of the options for each
field, the default settings and a description of
the field's function and any special information
needed to help understand the field's use.
Advanced
Select Item -/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
Select Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-15 Boot Menu
115
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 116
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-15 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Boot Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
QuickBoot Mode:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Enabled]
Turns on and off booting with a truncated set of Power On Self
Test. (Fewer tests mean faster turn on.)
Boot-time Diagnostic Screen:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
Turns on and off display of test results instead of Fujitsu logo
screen during Power On Self Test.
Preboot Execution
Environment:
Enabled; Disabled.
[Disabled]
Turns on and off the preboot execution environment feature.
Boot Device Priority:
Selects the Boot Device
Priority submenu.
—
This menu allows setting up the source for the operating system.
116
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 117
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Boot
Item Specific Help
[Diskette Drive]
[Hard Drive]
[ATAPI CD-ROM Drive]
➞
Use < > or < > to
select a device, then
press <+> or <Space>
to move it up the list,
or <-> to move it down
the list. Press <ESC>
to exit this menu.
Table 4-16 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Boot Device Priority submenu, all the
options for each field, the default settings and
a description of the field’s function and any
special information needed to help understand
the field’s use.
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Four
1.
2.
3.
➞
The Boot Device Priority
Submenu of the Boot Menu
The Boot Device Priority Submenu is for setting the order of checking of sources for the
operating system. Follow the instructions for
Navigating Through the Setup Utility to make
any changes. (See page 71.)
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-16 Boot Device Priority Submenu
117
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 118
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-16 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Boot Device Priority Submenu
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
1. Diskette Drive:
–—
–—
The boot selections determine the order in which the BIOS
searches for the operating system during a startup sequence. To
change the order highlight one source by using the up Õ, down
Ô cursor keys and then press the + or - key to change the order
number for that source. Be sure to save your changed order when
you exit the BIOS setup utility.
2. Hard Drive:
–—
–—
3. ATAPI CD-ROM Drive:
–—
–—
Exiting from Boot Menu
When you have finished setting the boot parameters with the Boot menu, you can either exit
from the setup utility or move to another menu.
If you wish to exit from the setup utility press
the Esc key to go to the Exit menu. If you wish
to move to another menu, use the cursor keys.
118
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 119
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
INFO MENU
Table 4-17 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Info menu, all the options for each field,
the default settings and a description of the
field’s function and any special information
needed to help understand the field’s use.
POINT
The asset number is an optional userentered field and can be entered
through the use of a third party DMI
Compliant software, such as LANdesk
Client Manager.
Main
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Boot
Info
Item Specific Help
BIOS Version:
BIOS Date:
BIOS Area:
1.06
08/21/1998
E800h - FFFFh
CPU Type:
CPU Speed:
L1 Cache:
L2 Cache:
Pentium(R) II
233 MHz
32 KB
512 KB
Total Memory:
On Board:
DIMM:
32 MB
32 MB SDRAM
Not Installed
Asset Number:
None
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
Four
The Info menu is a display only menu that
provides the configuration information for
your notebook.
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-17 Info Menu
119
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 120
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-17 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Info Menu
Menu Field
Options
Default
BIOS Version:
—
1.06
BIOS Date:
—
08/21/1998
BIOS Area:
—
E800h – FFFFh
CPU Type:
—
Pentium(R) II
CPU Speed:
—
233 MHz
L1 Cache:
—
32 KB
L2 Cache:
—
512 KB
Total Memory:
—
32 MB
On Board:
—
32 MB SDRAM
DIMM:
—
Not Installed
Asset Number
—
None
120
POINT
The information displayed on this screen
is variable according to the unit you
purchased. The CPU Type could be 233
Mhz, 266 Mhz or 300 Mhz and the total
memory could be 32MB, 64MB or 96MB
on your Info screen.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 121
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
EXIT MENU – LEAVING
THE SETUP UTILITY
Table 4-18 shows the names of the menu fields
for the Exit menu, all of the options for each
field, the default settings and a description of
the field's function and any special information
needed to help understand the field's use.
Advanced
PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
Security
Power Savings
Boot
Exit
Item Specific Help
Exit Saving Changes
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Setup Defaults
Discard Changes
Save Changes
Exit System Setup and
save your changes to
CMOS.
Four
The Exit Menu is used to leave the setup
utility. Follow the instructions for Navigating
Through the Setup Utility to make any changes.
(See page 71.)
Main
Select Item
Select Menu
-/Space Change Values
Enter Select Sub-Menu
▲
F1 Help
ESC Exit
F9 Setup Defaults
F10 Save and Exit
Figure 4-18 Exit Menu
121
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 122
S e c t i o n
F o u r
Table 4-18 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Exit Menu.
Menu Field
Exit Saving Changes:
Options
—
Default
—
Description
Exit Saving Changes and Exit will store all the entries on every
menu of the setup utility to the BIOS memory and then exit the
setup utility. A confirmation message Save Configuration
Changes and Exit Now? [Yes] [No] will be displayed.
Exit Discarding Changes:
—
—
Selecting Exit Discarding Changes and Exit will exit the setup
utility with out writing to the BIOS memory. When the BIOS
recognizes this selection it will load the operating system and begin
operation. A message Warning Configuration Changes
have not been saved. Save before exiting?
[Yes] [No] will be displayed.
Load Setup Defaults:
—
—
Selecting Load Setup Defaults will load the factory preset
default values for all menu fields, then display the message
Setup Confirmation Load Default configuration now?
[Yes] [No] When confirmed the setup utility will return to the
Exit Menu. To return to another menu follow the directions in the
Navigating Through the Setup Utility Section. (See page 71.)
122
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 123
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
Menu Field
Options
Default
Description
Discard Changes:
—
—
Selecting Discard Changes will load the values in BIOS
memory for all menu fields. Setup Confirmation Load
Previous values now? [Yes] [No] When confirmed
the setup utility will return to the Exit menu. To return to
another menu, follow the directions in the Navigating
Through the Setup Utility Section. (See page 71.)
Save Changes:
—
—
Selecting Save Changes will cause the new settings in all menus
to be written to the BIOS memory. Setup Confirmation
Save Changes now? [Yes] [No] When confirmed
the setup utility will return to the Exit menu. To return to another
menu, follow the directions in the Navigating Through the Setup
Utility section. (See page 71.)
123
Four
Table 4-18 Fields, Options and Defaults for the Exit Menu.
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 124
S e c t i o n
F o u r
SETTING UP YOUR
SAVE-TO-DISK FILE ALLOCATION
Your notebook comes with an allocation of space
on the internal hard drive adequate to operate the
Save-to-Disk function for the amount of memory
installed at the factory. If you add a memory
upgrade module or do not use the Save-to-Disk
function and wish to free up the disk space, you
will need to change your allocation. The utility to
change the allocations is PHDISK.EXE and is
activated from the MS-DOS prompt.
PHDISK allows you to perform five different
functions related to the Save-to-Disk space on
your internal hard drive. They are:
1. Allocate a space for the Save-to-Disk function.
2. Remove all space allocation for the Save-toDisk function.
3. Find out details about the hard drive and the
current Save-to-Disk space allocation.
124
4. Re-allocate space and mark bad blocks in the
space allocated to the Save-to-Disk function
when a disk error has occurred.
5. Find out how much space is needed to
perform the Save-to-Disk function with
the current memory configuration and how
much unused space is available on the
internal hard drive.
The screen will display the amount disk space
needed to perform the Save-to-Disk function
with the current memory configuration and
how much unused space is available on the
internal hard drive.
To find out details about the hard drive and
the current Save-to-Disk space allocation, do
the following:
To find out how much space is needed to
perform the Save-to-Disk function with the
current memory configuration and how
much unused space is available on the
internal hard drive, do the following:
2. At the DOS prompt type
CD C:\Fujitsu
1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.
4. Press the Enter key.
2. At the DOS prompt type
CD C:\Fujitsu
5. The screen will display the size of the space
currently allocated to the Save-to-Disk function and other parameters about the space
and the hard drive.
3. Type PHDISK
4. Press the Enter key.
1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.
3. Type PHDISK /INFO
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 125
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
C o n f i g u r i n g Yo u r L i f e B o o k E S e r i e s
1. Go to the Start Menu and select MS-DOS
Prompt.
2. Type CD C:\Fujitsu
3. Type PHDISK /DELETE /FILE.
4. Press the Enter key.
The utility will remove the space allocation for
the Save-to-Disk function and free that space
for other use.
To create a space allocation for the Save-toDisk function, do the following:
1. Restart your notebook in MS-DOS mode.
It will be of the minimum size needed to
support the Save-to-Disk function with the
current memory configuration.
If you have had a read or write error when you
tried to perform a Save-to-Disk operation you
can re-allocate space to compensate for bad
blocks on your drive. To do this:
CAUTION
Never use PARTITION in place of FILE
with the PHDISK Utility or you will
reformat your internal hard drive and all
data, applications and operating system
will be destroyed.
1. Go to the MS-DOS prompt.
Four
To remove all space allocation for the Save-toDisk function, do the following:
2. Type CD:\Fujitsu
3. Type PHDISK /REFORMAT /FILE
4. Press the Enter key.
5. The utility will re-create the Save-to-Disk file
called SAVE2DSK.BIN with the same usable
size and any bad blocks marked.
2. Type CD C:\Fujitsu
3. At the DOS prompt type
PHDISK /CREATE /FILE
4. Press the Enter key.
5. The utility will create a Save-to-Disk file
called SAVE2DSK.BIN in the root directory.
125
G Four Configuring.qxd 10/28/98 10:21 AM Page 126
S e c t i o n
126
F o u r
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 127
S e c t i o n
User Installable Features
Multi-function Bay Devices . . . . . . . . . 129
PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Parallel Port Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Serial Port Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
USB Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Stereo Line In Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Telephone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Ethernet Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mouse or Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Theft Prevention Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
External Installation of a
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Memory Upgrade Module . . . . . . . . . 141
LANdock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
F i v e
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 128
S e c t i o n
F i v e
SECTION FIVE
■
A stereo line in jack on the right side of your
notebook allows you to connect a sound
source such as a cassette recorder.
■
A headphone jack on the right side of your
notebook allows you to connect headphones
or powered speakers.
USER INSTALLABLE FEATURES
Your LifeBook E Series has a number of user
installable features:
■
■
■
■
PC Card slots in the left side panel of your
notebook allow you to install PC Cards,
IC memory cards (SRAM card) or Zoomed
Video cards (Slot 1 only).
The dual hot-swappable Multi-function bays
in the front of your notebook allow you to
install a CD-ROM drive, a floppy disk drive,
a second hard drive, a DVD-ROM drive, an
SuperDisk disk drive, a Zip drive.
A compartment on the bottom of your
notebook allows you to install a memory
upgrade module.
A microphone jack on the right side of
your notebook allows you to connect
a mono microphone.
■
A PS/2 port on the back of your notebook
allows you to connect an external mouse,
keyboard or numeric keypad.
■
An external floppy disk drive port on the
left side of your notebook allows you to
attach an external floppy disk drive when
the Multi-function bays are being used for
other purposes.
■
A USB port on the right side of your notebook allows you to connect a Universal Serial
Bus device.
POINT
Zoomed Video cards, USB ports and
infrared ports are not supported by the
Windows NT 4.0 operating system.
128
■
An RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack on the left side of
your notebook allows you to connect a telephone line to the internal modem or an
Ethernet cable to the internal network card.
■
A docking port on the back of your notebook
allows the connection of a docking device.
■
A serial port in the back of your notebook
allows you to connect serial devices, such
as RS-232C serial printers or scanners.
■
A parallel port in the back of your notebook
allows you to connect a parallel printer,
photo or text scanner, etc.
■
An external monitor port in the back of
your notebook allows you to connect an
external monitor.
This section describes how to install and remove
equipment for each of the expansion features.
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 129
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
U s e r
Bay 1 Devices
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
Bay 2 Devices
Floppy
Disk Drive
MULTI-FUNCTION BAY DEVICES
The bays in the front panel of your notebook
can accommodate a CD-ROM drive, a floppy
disk drive, Lithium ion batteries, a second
hard drive, a SuperDisk drive, a DVD drive,
or a weight saver.
CD-ROM Drive
DVD Drive
The Multi-function bays support a variety
of configurations and optional devices.
Zip Drive
Multi-function Bay 1 supports:
Lithium ion Battery
Lithium ion
Battery with
Adapter
SuperDisk Drive
This section describes all the possible
options available with the LifeBook E
series. You may not have all the optional
features described in this section.
■
3.5" floppy disk drive.
Lithium ion battery.
SuperDisk drive.
Multi-function Bay 2 supports:
■
Second Hard Drive
POINT
■
Five
■
Primary
Optional
Optional
■
Optional
Optional
■
Weight Saver
Figure 5-1 Multi-function Bay Devices
■
24x maximum
CD-ROM drive.
1.5-speed maximum
DVD-ROM drive.
Iomega Zip 100 drive.
Second 5.0GB hard drive.
129
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 130
S e c t i o n
■
■
F i v e
Lithium ion battery installed with Battery
Adapter for Multi-function Bay 2.
(Adapter included with your Battery.)
Weight Saver.
The Lithium ion battery included with your
notebook can power your notebook from either
bay. Your notebook also supports a dual battery
configuration with a Lithium ion battery in
both bays at the same time. (The optional
second battery must be purchased separately.)
CAUTION
The LifeBook E Series notebook does not
support multiple floppy disk drives, but
has two different places to install one.
130
CAUTION
Be careful aligning and seating modules
in the bay. If the fit is incorrect you may
damage the bay or the module. If the
module does not move easily, remove
it, and check for dirt or foreign objects.
It will require a firm push to latch the
module in place.
Removing a Device in Multi-function
Bay 1 or 2 When the System is Off.
1. Close any open files on the removable device
that you plan to eject from the computer, if a
device is currently installed and shut down.
Figure 5-2 Removing and Installing a
Device in Multi-function Bay 1
2. Slide the release latch at the left rear corner of
the Multi-function Bay toward the outer edge
of your notebook.
Installing a Device in Multi-function
Bay 1 or 2 When the System is Off.
1. Orient the item to be installed with the finger
ridge away from the body of your notebook
and the connector toward the body of
your notebook.
3. Slide the device forward until the unit is clear
of the compartment. This will require some
force. Use the finger ridge on the bottom of
the device.
2. With the module connector toward the back
of your notebook align the grooves on the
side of the device with the tracks in the side
of the bay. (Figure 5-3.)
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 131
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
3. Select the ‘Swap Devices’ menu.
4. The ‘Agate Tioman’ window will pop up and
display the following message: It is now
safe to remove and insert
devices in either Multi-function Bay. After you have completed device swapping, click
the OK button.
Figure 5-3 Removing and Installing a
Device in Multi-function Bay 2
3. Slide the module toward the back of your
notebook until it clicks into place.
Removing a Device in Multi-function
Bay 1 or 2 Using Tioman Hot Swap.
1. Close any open files on the removable
device(s) that you plan to eject from
the computer.
5. Slide the release latch at the left rear corner of
the Multi-function Bay toward the outer edge
of your notebook.
6. Slide the device forward until the unit is clear
of the compartment. This will require some
force. Use the finger ridge on the bottom of
the device.
Installing a Device in Multi-function
Bay 1 or 2 Using Tioman Hot Swap
1. Orient the item to be installed with the finger
ridge away from the body of your notebook
and the connector toward the body of
your notebook.
2. With the module connector toward the back
of your notebook align the grooves on the
side of the device with the tracks in the side
of the bay. (Figure 5-3.)
3. Slide the module toward the back of your
notebook until it clicks into place.
Five
U s e r
4. Press the ‘OK’ button to continue.
5. The software will automatically detect the
new devices and place them online.
2. Right-click on either ‘Tioman Taskbar Icon’
to display its menu.
131
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 132
S e c t i o n
F i v e
CD-ROM Drive or Optional DVD Drive
Your CD-ROM drive or DVD drive is durable
but you must treat it with care. Please pay
attention to the following points:
■
The drive rotates the compact disk at very
high speed. Do not carry it around or subject
it to shock or vibration with the power on.
■
Avoid using or storing the drive or CDs
where they will be exposed to extreme
temperatures.
■
Avoid using or storing the drive or CDs
where it is damp or dusty.
■
Avoid using or storing the drive near
magnets or devices that generate strong
magnetic fields.
■
■
Avoid storing the drive where it will
be subjected to shock or vibration.
Do not disassemble or dismantle
the CD-ROM drive or DVD drive.
For guidance on loading a CD in your
CD-ROM drive or DVD drive and caring
for CDs see Section Two. (See pages 44-46.)
132
POINT
DVD playback is not supported in
Windows NT 4.0.
Figure 5-4 CD-ROM Drive or DVD Drive
Optional Second Hard Drive
The optional second hard drive is durable but
must be treated with care. Please pay attention
to the following points:
■
The drive rotates the disk at very high speed.
Do not carry it around or subject it to shock
or vibration with the power on.
■
Avoid using or storing the drive where it will
be exposed to extreme temperatures.
■
Avoid using or storing the drive where it is
damp or dusty.
■
Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets
or devices that generate strong magnetic fields.
■
Avoid storing the drive where it will be
subjected to shock or vibration.
■
Do not disassemble or dismantle the hard
disk drive.
After the optional second hard drive is installed
it will take a short time for your notebook to
recognize it.
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 133
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Fdisk/Format
You will need to Fdisk/format your optional
second hard drive when you install it for the
very first time. Check your operating system
documentation for information on initializing
a hard drive. Be careful to only format your
optional second hard drive once or you will
erase everything you have stored on it.
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
Lithium ion Battery
Your Lithium ion battery is durable and long
lasting but should not be exposed to extreme
temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or
other hazards.
CAUTION
If the Lithium ion battery connector is
not fully seated, you may not be able
to use your notebook or charge
your battery.
Installing the Battery
The battery may be installed singly in either
bay, using the Battery Adapter for Multi-function Bay 2. With the purchase of an additional
battery, batteries may be installed in a dual
configuration, one in each bay. A bridge
battery allows a charged Lithium ion battery
to be exchanged for a discharged one by
“warm-swapping”. To warm-swap, have a
charged battery ready to install, put your
notebook in Suspend mode, remove the low
battery and quickly insert the charged battery.
The NiCd bridge battery is built-in your notebook and is constantly being charged. The
bridge battery capacity is not large, about 3
minutes, and can vary with the condition of
your notebook. (See page 38.)
Batteries should be removed and stored separately in a cool dry place if your notebook is
not going to be used for an extended period
of time.
Figure 5-5 Optional Second Hard Drive
Figure 5-6 Lithium ion Battery with Adapter
for Multi-Function Bay 2
133
Five
U s e r
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 134
S e c t i o n
F i v e
CAUTION
Data may be lost and/or system errors
introduced if the warm-swap is not
performed quickly or a power adapter
is not installed.
CAUTION
The bridge battery can not support an
operating notebook. The notebook must
be in Suspend mode.
Under federal, state or local law it may be illegal
to dispose of batteries by putting them in the
trash. Please take care of our environment and
dispose of batteries properly. Check with your
local government authority for details regarding
recycling or disposing of your old battery, or
contact your support representative at
1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487).
134
Optional Zip Drive
The optional Zip drive using removable Zip
disks, with a capacity of 100MB, can be
installed in Multi-function Bay 2 only.
The first time you use a Zip drive on your
LifeBook E Series notebook, you should install
the Zip Tools software onto your system.
POINT
You may receive the following error while
installing the Zip Tools software: “No
Iomega drives found.” Select OK. The
installation process will continue correctly.
Installing the Zip Tools software.
1. Insert the Zip drive in Multi-function
Bay 2 as described on page 130.
2. Insert the Zip Tools disk into the Zip drive.
3. Use the Run command from the Windows
Start menu to run d:\install from the Zip
drive. Note that your system may assign
a drive designator other than d: to the
Zip drive.
4. Select your language preference and follow
the instructions that appear on the screen.
Figure 5-7 Zip Drive
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 135
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
U s e r
Weight Saver
The Weight Saver bay device can be installed in
Multi-function Bay 2 only and is used to fill the
bay when no device is needed.
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
Optional SuperDisk Drive
An optional Imation SuperDisk drive, using
Super floppy disks with a capacity of 120MB
and standard floppy disks, can be installed in
Multi-function Bay 1. The SuperDisk drive can
take the place of a standard floppy disk drive
and offers greater storage capacity using the
new 120MB Super floppy disks.
tion bay is needed for other uses. (For information on the care and use of floppy disk drives see
Floppy Disk Drive in Section Two on pages 42-43.
To install the floppy disk drive externally, see
External Installation of a Floppy Disk Drive
on page 140.)
PC CARDS
PC Cards perform a wide variety of functions,
and are ideal for mobile computers.
Some available PC Cards:
Fax/data modem cards (Type II).
Figure 5-8 Weight Saver
Figure 5-9 Floppy Disk Drive or SuperDisk Drive
Floppy Disk Drive
The floppy disk drive can be installed in Multifunction Bay 1. In addition, the floppy disk drive
may be installed externally when the Multi-func-
Five
■
■
Local area network (LAN) cards (Type II).
■
Wireless LAN cards (Type II).
■
1MB and 2MB static RAM (SRAM) cards
(Type I).
■
IDE solid-state disk cards (Type II).
■
SCSI cards (Type II).
■
Zoomed Video cards (Type II, Slot 1 only).
■
ATA cards (Type III).
135
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 136
S e c t i o n
■
F i v e
Other PC Cards that conform to PCMCIA
2.1 or CardBus standards.
PC Card Lock
POINT
Windows NT 4.0 does not support
Zoomed video cards.
For further information, refer to the instructions supplied with your PC Card.
Caring for PC Cards
PC Cards are durable; however, you must treat
them with care. The documentation supplied
with your PC Card will provide specific information but you should pay attention to the
following points:
■
To keep out dust and dirt, store PC Cards
in their protective sleeves when they are not
installed in your notebook.
■
Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight
or excessive heat.
■
Keep the cards dry.
■
Do not flex or bend the cards, and do not
place heavy objects on top of them.
■
Do not force cards into the slot.
■
Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting them
to excessive vibration.
Eject Button Slot 2
CAUTION
Do not insert a PC Card into a slot if there
is water or any other substance on the
card; you may permanently damage the
card, your notebook, or both.
Eject Button Slot 1
Figure 5-10 Installing and Removing a PC Card
136
Installing or Removing PC
Cards in Your Notebook
PC cards are installed in the PC Card slot in the
left side panel of your notebook. Some PC Cards
will not work when all possible devices are
enabled. If a PC Card is not recognized, you will
need to open the Control panel, the System folder, and then the Device Manager, and choose a
device to disable so that the resources can be
used by the PC Card.
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 137
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Installing a PC Card
1. See your PC Card manual for instructions on
installation of that specific card.
2. Make sure that there is not already a PC Card
in the slot. If there is, eject it, as described in
Removing PC Cards.
3. Insert the PC Card in the card slot, with the
product name label facing up. (Figure 5-10.)
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
4. When the PC Card is fully inserted, the eject
button will pop out.
5. Flip this button toward the front of your
notebook to fold it out of the way.
6. When the card is installed, lock it in place
by sliding the Lock button toward the front
of your notebook. (Figure 5-10.)
CAUTION
CAUTION
Some PC Cards can only be installed or
removed with the power in Suspend
mode, some only with power Off.
Please check the card documentation
for correct usage.
CAUTION
Installing or removing a card while your
notebook is in the process of going
through the power on or power off
sequence may damage the card and/or
your notebook.
Windows has a shutdown procedure for
PC Cards that must be followed before
beginning to remove a card.
Removing PC Cards
1. Shutdown operation of the card.
2. Click on the PC Card indicator on the
Windows taskbar.
5. If the device cannot be removed
message appears, save all files, close all
applications, and exit Windows then shutoff
the power with the power switch.
(See Power Off on pages 24-25.)
CAUTION
If the PC Card has an external connector
and cable, do not pull on this cable when
removing the card.
PARALLEL PORT DEVICES
To connect a parallel interface device to the parallel port, be sure that the connector is the right
size and aligned, then push in until it is fully
seated. When it is seated tighten the hold-down
screws, one on each end of the connector.
(See Figure 1-9 on page 10.)
3. Select the card to be removed and click
on the Stop button.
4. Verify that the You can safely
remove your card message appears.
137
Five
U s e r
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 138
S e c t i o n
F i v e
SERIAL PORT DEVICES
MICROPHONE
TELEPHONE LINES
To connect an RS-232C device to the serial
port, be sure that the connector is the right size
and aligned, then push in until it is fully seated.
When it is seated tighten the hold-down screws,
one on each end of the connector.
(See Figure 1-9 on page 10.)
Make sure that your mono microphone is
equipped with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) mono
mini-plug. Make sure the plug is aligned
and push it into the jack until fully seated.
(See Figure 1-8 on page 9.)
USB DEVICES
Make sure that your stereo line in audio device,
a cassette recorder, for example, is equipped
with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. Make
sure the plug is aligned and push it into the jack
until fully seated. (See Figure 1-8 on page 9.)
To attach a telephone line to the internal
modem, locate the RJ-11 jack on the left side of
your notebook. Plug one end of the telephone
cable into the telephone line outlet. Orient the
telephone cable with the release latch on the
connector down. Push it into the jack until it
clicks and latches. (See Figure 1-9 on page 10.)
When installing a device on the USB Port, be
sure that the connector is the right size, aligned,
and fully seated. (See Figure 1-8 on page 9.)
POINT
Windows NT 4.0 does not support
USB devices.
CAUTION
Due to the limitations of Windows 95 at
the time USB technology was evolving,
not all USB devices and/or drivers are
guaranteed to work with Windows 95.
138
STEREO LINE IN DEVICE
HEADPHONES
Make sure that your stereo headphones are
equipped with an 1/8" (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. Make sure the plug is aligned and push
it into the jack until fully seated.
(See Figure 1-8 on page 9.)
POINT
Plugging in headphones disables the
built-in stereo speakers.
CAUTION
The internal modem is not intended for
use with Digital PBX systems. Do not
connect the internal modem to a digital
PBX as it may cause serious damage to
the internal modem or your entire notebook. Consult your PBX manufacturer’s
documentation for details. Some hotels
have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find
out BEFORE you connect your modem.
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 139
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
U s e r
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
ETHERNET CABLES
EXTERNAL MONITOR
THEFT PREVENTION LOCK
To attach an Ethernet cable to your internal
LAN card, locate the RJ-45 connector on the
left side of your notebook. Plug one end of the
Ethernet cable into your LAN (see your systems
administrator if you are unsure). Orient the
Ethernet cable with the release latch on the connector down. Push it into the RJ-45 connector
until it clicks and latches.
You may install an external monitor on the
external monitor port on the rear panel of your
notebook. Make sure that the wide side of the
connector is up and attach it to the port by
pushing in until it is seated, then tighten the
hold-down screw on each end of the connector.
(See Figure 1-9 on page 10.)
A physical security system lock can be installed
on the right side of your notebook. (See Figure
1-8 on page 9 for the location of the lock slot.)
Simply insert the key end of your security
system in the slot, rotate 90 degrees and lock.
(See Figure 1-8 on page 9.)
Make sure the connector on your device is
the correct PS/2 type. Align the arrow on the
connector to point to the bottom of your notebook and push it in until the connector seats.
A mouse, keyboard or keypad may be installed
and automatically recognized by your notebook
without restarting or changing setups.
(See Figure 1-8 on page 9.)
CAUTION
Pressing F10 while holding down the Fn
key allows you to change your selection
of where to send your display video. Each
time you press the combination of keys
you will step to the next choice. The
choices, in order, are: built-in display panel
only, external monitor only, or both built-in
display panel and external monitor.
Five
MOUSE, KEYBOARD OR KEYPAD
139
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 140
S e c t i o n
F i v e
EXTERNAL INSTALLATION
OF A FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
To install a floppy disk drive externally,
you must mount the modular floppy disk drive
in the optional external adapter and attach the
external adapter to the connector on your
notebook.
5. Align the connector of the external floppy
disk drive adapter with the connector
towards the body of your notebook with the
wide side of the connector up. (Figure 5-11)
6. Insert the connector of the external floppy
disk drive adapter firmly into the port on
your notebook until it clicks.
To connect a floppy disk drive externally:
1. Close all files and exit all applications.
To disconnect an external floppy disk drive:
1. Close all files and exit all applications
2. Turn off power to your notebook, close
the display and remove the AC adapter.
(See pages 24-25 for more information.)
2. Turn off power to your notebook, close
the display and remove the AC adapter.
(See pages 24-25 for more information.)
3. Mount the floppy disk drive in the external
adapter by aligning the connector ends and
pushing the drive into the external adapter
until it clicks into place.
3. Squeeze together firmly on the release buttons on either side of the external floppy
disk drive connector next to the body of
your notebook. (Figure 5-11.)
4. Open the external floppy disk drive port
cover on the left side panel of your notebook, (see Figure 5-11), by gently pulling
on the right side of the cover and then
tilting it open.
4. Pull the connector free.
140
5. Close the floppy disk drive port cover on
your notebook and press it shut until
it latches.
6. Remove the floppy disk drive from the
external adapter.
External Floppy Disk
Drive Port
External Floppy Disk
Drive Connector Cover
Connector
Release Button
External Floppy
Disk Drive
Figure 5-11 External Installation of a Floppy Disk Drive.
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 141
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
U s e r
Your notebook has 32MB of on-board SDRAM.
To increase your memory capacity you may
install a memory upgrade module in the memory upgrade compartment in the bottom of
your notebook. The memory upgrade module
is a Small Outline dual-in-line memory module
(SODIMM). You may add modules of different
capacity.
POINT
If your LifeBook E Series is a Built-toorder configuration with 64 or 96MB of
pre-installed SDRAM you will already
have a memory module DIMM installed
in the upgrade compartment. To replace
or remove the module, follow the directions that procede.
F e a t u r e s
To Install a Memory Upgrade Module:
1. Turn off power to your notebook using
the power switch, (see Power Off on pages
24-25), and remove any power adapter
(AC or auto/airline).
2. Make sure that all the connector covers
are closed.
3. Turn the notebook bottom side up, with the
front panel toward you.
6. Remove the memory upgrade module from
the static guarded sleeve.
CAUTION
The memory upgrade module can be
severely damaged by electro-static discharge (ESD). Be sure you are properly
grounded when handling and installing
the module.
4. Remove the screws at the front of the
memory upgrade module compartment.
(See Figure 5-12.)
Five
MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE
I n s t a l l a b l e
5. Remove the cover by tilting the front edge
up and then pulling forward until the tabs
on the cover are free. (See Figure 5-12.)
CAUTION
Never remove screws except the ones
specifically shown in the directions for
installing and removing the memory
upgrade module.
Figure 5-12 Opening the Memory Upgrade Compartment
141
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 142
S e c t i o n
F i v e
7. Align the memory upgrade module with
the part side up. Align the connector edge
of the memory upgrade module with the
connector slot in the compartment. The
connector will be pointing toward the rear
of the notebook. (Figure 5-13.)
9. Press the memory upgrade module down
into the compartment until it lodges under
the retaining clip. You will hear a click when
it is properly in place.
10. Replace the cover by hooking the tabs
under the rear edge of the compartment
opening and tilting down until flush with
the bottom of your notebook.
11. Replace the screws.
The memory upgrade module is not something
you routinely remove from your notebook.
Once it is installed, you can leave it in place
unless you want to increase system
memory capacity.
Figure 5-13 Installing a Memory Upgrade Module
8. Insert the memory upgrade module at a
45° angle. (Figure 5-13.) Press the connector
edge of the module firmly down and into
the connector.
142
CAUTION
Before you install or remove the memory
upgrade module, save changes and close
all files and turn power off to your notebook. (See Power Off on pages 24-25.)
Figure 5-14 Removing a Memory Upgrade Module
To Remove a Memory Upgrade Module:
1. Perform steps 1 through 5 of To Install a
Memory Upgrade Module.
2. Pull the clips sideways away from each side
of the memory upgrade module at the same
time. (Figure 5-14.)
3. While holding the clips out, remove the
module from the slot by lifting it up and
pulling towards the front of your notebook.
(Figure 5-14.)
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 143
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
4. Store the memory upgrade module in a
static guarded sleeve.
5. Replace the cover by following the instructions
in steps 10 and 11 of the instructions for To
Install a Memory Upgrade Module, or install
a new memory upgrade module and then
replace the cover by following the instructions
in steps 7 through 11 of the instructions
To Install a Memory Upgrade Module.
CAUTION
The memory upgrade module can
be severely damaged by electro-static
discharge (ESD). Be sure you are properly
grounded when handling and removing
the module.
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
Checking the Computer
Recognition of New Memory Capacity
When you have changed system memory capacity by adding or removing a memory upgrade
module, be sure to check that your notebook
has recognized all of the memory. You can
check memory capacity by looking at the Main
menu of the setup utility:
1. Turn on power using the power switch.
2. Enter the setup utility by pressing the F2
key as soon as the Fujitsu logo appears
on the screen.
3. The System Memory and the Extended
Memory capacity, as detected by your notebook during the Power On Self Test (POST),
are displayed at the bottom of the Main
menu screen.
Example: A system with 32MB of memory
will display 640K System Memory, 31MB
Extended Memory.
When you have installed additional memory,
the display should change. For example for:
Total RAM
Installed
32 MB
48 MB
64 MB
96 MB
128 MB
System
Memory
640 K
640 K
640 K
640 K
640 K
Extended
Memory
31.7 MB
48.5 MB
64.5 MB
97 MB
128.5 MB
Five
U s e r
If the total memory displayed is not what you
believe it should be, check that your memory
upgrade module is properly installed. If it is
properly installed and the capacity is not correctly recognized, see the Troubleshooting
Section starting on page 150.
143
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 144
S e c t i o n
F i v e
CAUTION
Follow the instructions that come with
your LANdock or Port Replicator. The
instructions and illustrations in this
manual are only to serve as a guideline.
The LANdock manual that is included
with the LANdock unit supersedes
these instructions.
2. Remove all connections from the rear
panel of your notebook. (See Figure 1-9
on page 10.)
3. Make sure that the adjustment feet are flat
against the bottom of the notebook and the
covers of the connectors, both rear panel
and right side panel, are closed.
CAUTION
Make sure you always have a battery
installed in Multi-function Bay 1 or 2
when hot-docking your notebook. Failure
to do so can severly damage the system.
LANdock unit
4. Make sure that the slide cover in the rear
panel is completely open.
5. Set your notebook on the Docking Station
Leveler, making sure that the Alignment
pins on the leveler (Figures 5-15 and 5-17.)
fit into the Docking Alignment receptacles
in the bottom of your notebook
(Figure 1-10 on page 11.)
Docking Connector
Docked LED
Leveling
Alignment Foot
Ready to Undock LED
Undock Request Button
LANDOCK
Docking Release Lever
To Hot Dock your Notebook in a LANdock
with Windows 95 or Windows 98
1. To use a docking device with your notebook
they both must be on a flat surface.
Alignment Notches
Docking Alignment Pins
Figure 5-15 LANdock Front View
144
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 145
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
U s e r
I n s t a l l a b l e
F e a t u r e s
6. Arrange the notebook/leveler combination
to align the docking connector on the docking device body with the Docking port on
your notebook and the notches on the
leveler with the notches on the docking
device body.
8. Lock in place by pulling the Docking
Release lever forward.
7. Push together firmly.
10. Your notebook is ready to use. (When setting
it up for the first time you must use the
power switch.)
Undock Request Button
9. Verify that docking is complete by checking
that the LifeBook Docked LED is illuminated.
(See Figure 5-16.)
RJ-45 Jack
Dual USB Ports
MIDI/Joystick Port
Five
Ready to Undock LED
External Monitor Port
Docked LED
External Floppy
Disk Drive Port
DC Power Jack
PS/2 Mouse Port
PC Card Slot
Headphone
Jack
PS/2 Keyboard Port
Serial Port
Parallel Port
Figure 5-17 Installing a LANdock
Figure 5-16 LANdock Rear View
145
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 146
S e c t i o n
F i v e
POINT
You may also put your notebook in
Suspend mode to dock the unit. It is
always safe to dock the unit with the
power switch off.
Connecting Devices to the
LANdock or Port Replicator
Connect devices to your LANdock or Port
Replicator in exactly the same way you would
your notebook. Figure 5-16 shows the location of
LANdock ports and jacks. Figure 5-19 shows the
location of the Port Replicator ports and jacks.
Remember that on the LANdock and the Port
Replicator there are separate ports for mouse
and keyboard. You must use the correct one.
146
To Hot-Undock Your Notebook
from the LANdock with Windows 95
and Windows 98
1. From the Start menu click on Eject PC or
press the Undock button on the LANdock.
2. Wait for the Safe to Undock LED to illuminate, even if a message appears on your
screen saying that you may undock.
3. Your notebook will not suspend.
4. Push the lever on the side of the station
backward until the docking device connectors are completely clear of your notebook.
5. Very carefully lift your notebook clear of the
Alignment pins in the bottom.
POINT
If the notebook power switch is turned
off it is always safe to undock. You do
not have to turn on your notebook and
use the Eject PC feature.
CAUTION
When your notebook is mounted in
the LANdock it is essentially a desktop
PC not a mobile notebook. DO NOT
unplug the docking device with the operating system active. You may cause a loss
of data and a system error when you
restart your notebook.
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 147
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
U s e r
PORT REPLICATOR
To connect your notebook to the Port
Replicator, follow the docking instructions that
come with the Port Replicator.
In the LANdock you have added capabilities:
■
In the Windows 98 Start menu there is an
Eject PC choice above the Shutdown selection. (Use the Eject PC choice to enable the
undocking of your LifeBook.)
■
Both an external mouse and an external keyboard can be connected at the same time. Be
sure to plug them into the correct PS/2 ports.
■
There is an RJ-45 jack for 10/100 Base-T
Ethernet connections.
■
There is an additional PC Card slot.
Using Your Notebook
While it is Installed in the Port Replicator
There are a few differences you will notice
between using your notebook in and out of
the Port Replicator.
■
In the Windows 95 Start menu there is an
Eject PC choice between the Suspend mode
and Shutdown selections. (Use the Eject PC
choice to enable the undocking of
your LifeBook.)
■
F e a t u r e s
Both an external mouse and an external keyboard can be connected at the same time. Be
sure to plug them into the correct PS/2 ports.
Port Replicator
Docking Connector
Five
Using Your Notebook
While it is Installed in the LANdock
There are a few differences you will notice
between using your notebook in and out
of the LANdock.
I n s t a l l a b l e
Leveling
Alignment Foot
Docking Release Lever
Alignment Notches
Docking
Alignment Pins
Figure 5-18 Port Replicator Front View
147
H Five UserInstallable.qxd 10/28/98 10:26 AM Page 148
S e c t i o n
F i v e
CAUTION
When your notebook is mounted in the
Port Replicator it is essentially a desktop
PC not a mobile notebook. DO NOT
unplug the Port Replicator with the
operating system active. You may cause
a loss of data and a system error when
you restart your notebook.
Dual USB Ports
External Monitor Port
DC Power Jack
External Floppy
Disk Drive Port
PS/2 Mouse Port
Serial Port
PS/2 Keyboard Port
Parallel Port
Figure 5-19 Port Replicator Rear View
148
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 149
S e c t i o n
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Specific Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Power On Self Test Messages . . . . . . . . 170
Emergency CD-ROM/DVD
Tray Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Modem Setup and Commands . . . . . . . 173
Recovery CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
S i x
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 150
S e c t i o n
S i x
SECTION SIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
The LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu is
sturdy and subject to few problems in the field.
However, you may encounter simple setup or
operating problems that you can solve on the
spot, or problems with peripheral devices, that
you can solve by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and
resolve some of these straightforward problems,
and identify failures that require service.
IDENTIFYING THE PROBLEM
If you encounter a problem, go through the
following procedure before pursuing complex
troubleshooting:
1. Turn off your notebook using the power
switch on the right side panel.
2. Make sure the AC adapter is plugged
into your notebook and to an active AC
power source.
150
3. Make sure that any card installed in the
PC Card slot is seated properly. You can
also remove the card from the slot, thus
eliminating it as a possible cause of failure.
4. Make sure that any devices connected to
the external connectors are plugged
in properly. You can also disconnect such
devices, thus eliminating them as possible
causes of failure.
5. Turn on your notebook using the power
switch. Make sure it has been off at least
10 seconds before you turn it on.
6. Go through the boot sequence.
7. If the problem has not been resolved, refer
to the problem guide table, which follows, for
more detailed troubleshooting information.
(Page 151 has an index to the table.)
POINT
If you keep notes about what you have
tried, your support representative may be
able to help you more quickly by giving
additional suggestions over the phone.
CAUTION
Do not return a failed notebook to
your supplier until you have talked to
a support representative.
8. If you have tried the solutions suggested in
Specific Problems without success, contact
your support representative:
toll free 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487)
fax 1-901-259-5700
e-mail 8fujitsu@fpc.fujitsu.com
Web Site http://www.8fujitsu.com.
Before you place the call, you should have
the following information ready so that the
customer support representative can provide
you with the fastest possible solution:
■
Product name.
■
Product configuration number.
■
Product serial number.
■
Purchase date.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 151
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Conditions under which the problem occurred.
■
Any error messages that have occurred.
■
Hardware configuration.
■
Type of printer connected, if any.
See the Configuration Label on the bottom of
your notebook for configuration and serial
numbers. (Refer to Figure 1–10 on page 11.)
SPECIFIC PROBLEMS
Using PC-Doctor
PC-Doctor is a diagnostic program by
Watergate Software, Inc. which comes preinstalled on your notebook. If your are an
experienced computer user you may find it
useful, however, it is intended primarily to
help your Fujitsu support representative better
serve you. When you call for help your support
representative may ask you to setup your notebook for modem operation. You will be told
what to do step by step, and then to hang up
the phone and plug your phone line into
the back of your notebook. Your support
representative will then use the service
computer to call your notebook and perform
diagnostic tests to find the nature of your
problem. Messages will be displayed on the
screen explaining what is being done and
giving any instructions that you need.
User Problem Guides
When you have problems with your notebook,
try to find the symptoms under the Problem
column of the table for the feature giving
you difficulty. You will find a description of
common causes for that symptom under the
column Possible Cause and what, if anything,
you can do to correct the condition under
Possible Solution.
Remember that it helps to keep notes of
what you have tried and the results when you
are troubleshooting.
Problem
Page
Audio Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
CD-ROM Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Docking Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Floppy Disk Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Hard Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Keyboard or Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . .155
Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Modem Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Parallel, Serial, and USB Device Problems . .157
PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Shutdown and Startup Problems . . . . . . . . .164
Video Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Miscellaneous Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
151
Six
■
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 152
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
1. The volume knob is turned too low.
1. Adjust the volume control knob on the right
side of your notebook.
2. Adjust the sound volume control settings
in your software, both operating system
and applications.
3. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in
speakers, remove the headphones.
4. Set the BIOS setup utility, Multimedia
Device Configuration submenu of the
Advanced menu to the default values.
(See pages 84-85.)
5. Refer to your application and operating
system documentation for help.
Audio Problems
There is no sound coming from
the built-in speakers.
2. The software volume control is set too low.
3. Headphones are plugged into your notebook.
4. BIOS audio settings are incorrect.
5. Software driver is not configured correctly.
CD-ROM Drive Problems
Notebook fails to recognize CD-ROM.
1. Shipping card is still in the CD-ROM drive tray.
2. CD-ROM is installed with label face down.
3. CD-ROM is not pushed down onto raised
center circle of drive.
4. CD-ROM tray is not latched shut.
152
1. Remove shipping card and replace
CD in tray.
2. Open CD-ROM tray and re-install CD with
proper orientation.
3. Open CD-ROM tray and re-install CD properly.
4. Push on the front of the CD-ROM tray until
it latches.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 153
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
5. Setup utility is set to something other than
CD-ROM or Auto for the Secondary
Master Controller.
5. Revise BIOS settings to set the Secondary
Master correctly. (See Main menu and
Primary Master submenu pages 75-78 for
more information.)
6. Verify the drive designator used by the
application is the same as the one used by
the operating system. When the operating
system is booted from a CD-ROM drive
designations are automatically adjusted.
7. Start the CD from the desktop or
application software or re-enable the
Windows CD auto insertion function.
(See CD-ROM Access Indicator on pages
30-31 for more information.)
6. Wrong drive designator was used for
CD-ROM in the application.
7. Windows CD auto insertion function
is disabled.
The CD-ROM Access indicator on the Status
Indicator panel blinks at regular intervals when
no CD is in the tray or the CD-ROM drive is
not installed.
1. The Windows CD auto insertion function
is active and is checking to see if a CD is
ready to run.
Six
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
1. This is normal.
You can disable this function if you wish.
(See CD-ROM Access Indicator on pages
30-31 for more information.)
153
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 154
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
1. LANdock AC adapter is not
plugged in.
2. Notebook is not properly seated in the
LANdock.
1. Provide power to the LAN-Docking
Station.
2. Remove and re-dock your notebook.
and verify that the Docked LED illuminates.
1. Security is set to protect access to floppy
disk data.
2. Floppy disk is not loaded correctly.
1. Verify your password and security settings.
Docking Problems
Notebook does not turn on when installed in
Docking Station.
Floppy Disk Drive
You cannot access your floppy disk.
3. BIOS setup utility has Diskette
Controller: Disabled.
4. The floppy disk drive may not be
properly installed.
5. You tried to write to a write protected
floppy disk.
154
2. Eject floppy disk, check orientation and
re-insert. (See Floppy Disk Drive
on pages 42-43.)
3. Revise the setup utility Main menu settings.
(See Main Menu on page 72.)
4. Remove and re-install your floppy disk drive.
(See Multi-function Bays on pages 129-131, or
External Installation of a Floppy Disk Drive
on page 140.)
5. Eject the floppy disk and set it to write
enabled. (See page 43.)
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 155
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
1. The setup utility is set to something other
than the characteristics of your internal or
optional second hard drive.
1. Revise BIOS settings to set both Primary
Master and Primary Slave correctly.
(See Main Menu and Primary Master
Submenu pages 75-78 for more
information.) (Internal is Primary Master
and optional second is Primary Slave.)
2. Verify drive designator used by application
is in use by the operating system. When the
operating system is booted from a CD-ROM,
drive designations are automatically adjusted.
3. Verify your password and security settings.
(See Security menu on page 101.)
Hard Drive Problems
You can not access your hard drive.
2. The wrong drive designator was used by an
application when a bootable CD-ROM was
used to start the notebook.
Six
3. Security is set so operating system can not
be started without a password.
Keyboard or Mouse Problems
The built-in keyboard does not seem to work.
1. The notebook has gone into Suspend mode.
2. Your application has locked out
your keyboard.
1. Push the Suspend/Resume button.
2. Try to use the ErgoTrac pointing device
to access the Start menu and then the
ShutDown menu and restart the System.
If this fails then turn your notebook off,
wait 10 seconds or more, and then turn
it on using the power switch.
155
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 156
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
You have installed an external keyboard.
1. Your external device is not properly installed.
1. Re-install your device. (See Mouse or
Keyboard on page 139.) or mouse, and it
does not seem to work.
2. Check your device and operating system
documentation and activate the proper driver.
3. Plug the mouse into the PS/2 Mouse port
and the external keyboard or numeric
key pad into the PS/2 Keyboard port.
(Figure 1-9 on page 10.)
2. Your operating system software is not setup
with the correct software driver for that device.
3. Your mouse or keyboard is connected to the
wrong PS/2 port on the LANdock.
You have connected an external keyboard or a
mouse and it seems to be locking up the system.
1. Your operating system software is not setup
with the correct software driver for that device.
2. Your system has crashed.
1. Check your device and operating system
documentation and activate the proper driver.
2. Restart your system by shutting down
and/or turning off the power, waiting at
least 10 seconds and then turning the
power on again.
1. Your memory upgrade module is not
properly installed.
1. Remove and re-install your memory
upgrade module. (See Memory Upgrade
Module on pages 141-143.)
2. Check for Power On Self Test (POST)
messages. (See pages 170-172 for possible
messages and their meanings.)
Memory Problems
Your power on screen or Main menu of the
BIOS setup utility information does not show
the correct amount of installed memory.
2. You have a memory failure.
156
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 157
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
1. Messages about modem operation are
generated by whichever modem application
is in use.
1. See your application software documentation for additional information.
1. The device is not properly installed.
1. Remove and re-install the device.
(See Parallel Port Devices on page 137,
Serial Port on Devices on page 138, or USB
Devices on page 138.)
2. Close your application and restart
your notebook.
Modem Problems
Messages about modem operation.
You have installed a parallel-port device,
a serial-port device or a USB device.
Your notebook does not recognize the device,
or the device does not seem to work properly.
CAUTION
Windows NT 4.0 does not support
USB devices.
CAUTION
Due to the limitations of Windows 95 at
the time USB technology was evolving, not
all USB devices and/or drivers are guaranteed to work with Windows 95.
2. The device may have been installed with an
application running and your notebook
doesn’t know it’s there.
3. Your software may not have the correct
software driver active.
4. You may have the wrong I/O address
selected for your device.
5. Your device and another device are
assigned the same I/O address.
3. See your software documentation and
activate the correct driver.
4. See your device documentation and
software documentation to determine the
required I/O address.
5. Check all I/O addresses in the BIOS Setup
Utility and your other installed hardware
and software and make sure there are
no duplications.
157
Six
Parallel, Serial, and USB Device Problems
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 158
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
1. The card is not properly installed.
.
2. The card may have been installed with an
application running and your notebook
doesn’t know it’s there.
3. Your software may not have the correct
software driver active.
4. You may have the wrong I/O address
selected for your PC Card device.
5. Your PC Card device and another device are
assigned the same I/O address.
1. Remove and re-install the card.
(See PC Cards on pages 135-137.)
2. Close your application and
restart your notebook.
PC Card Problems
A card inserted in the PC Card slot
does not work or is locking up the system.
158
3. See your software documentation
and activate the correct driver.
4. See your PC Card documentation to
determine the required I/O address.
5. Check all I/O addresses in the BIOS setup
utility and your other installed hardware
and make sure there are no duplications.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 159
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
1. The installed primary battery is completely
discharged, there is no optional second
battery installed and there is no Power adapter
(AC or auto/airline) installed.
1. When all the batteries are dead there will be
a beep when the power switch is turned on
and the notebook will immediately go into
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page
41.) Check the Status Indicator panel to
determine the presence and condition of
the batteries. (See pages 28.) Install the
primary battery if it is not installed or a
Power adapter if all batteries are dead
or unavailable.
2. When the batteries are dead there will be a
beep when the power switch is turned on
and the notebook will immediately go into
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page 41.)
Check the Status Indicator panel to determine the presence and condition of the
batteries and adapter. (See Figure 3-1 on
page 28.) Verify that your adapter is
connected correctly. (See page 14.)
You turn on your notebook and
nothing seems to happen.
2. The primary battery is installed but is
completely discharged, there is no optional
second battery installed and the Power adapter
(AC or auto/airline) is not plugged in properly.
159
Six
Power Failures
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 160
S e c t i o n
Problem
S i x
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
3. The primary battery is installed but is
completely discharged, there is no optional
second battery installed and the Power adapter
(AC or auto/airline) has no power from the
AC outlet, airplane seat jack, or the car’s
cigarette lighter.
3. When the battery is dead there will be a
beep when the power switch is turned on
and the notebook will immediately go into
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page 41.)
Check the Status Indicator cigarette lighter
panel to determine the presence and condition of the batteries and adapter. (See Figures
3-1 on page 28.) Move the AC cord to a
different outlet, check for a line switch or
tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet,
if you are using an auto/airline adapter in
in a car make sure the ignition switch is in
in the On or Accessories position.
4. When the battery is dead there will be
a beep when the power switch is turned
on and the notebook will immediately
go into Dead Battery Suspend mode.
(See page 41.) Verify the cause using the
Status Indicator panel to determine the
presence and condition of the batteries and
adapter. (See Figure 3-1 on page 28.) Try a
different Power adapter or install a charged
optional second battery.
4. The primary battery is installed but is
completely discharged, there is no optional
second battery installed and the Power
adapter (AC or auto/airline) is faulty.
160
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 161
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
5. Power switch is already in the On position.
5. Try the Suspend/Resume button. If that
doesn’t work, slide your power switch firmly
to the front, pause 10 seconds or more and
then firmly to the rear.
6. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the
presence and condition of the batteries.
(See Figure 3-1 on page 28.) Install a Power
adapter or install a battery in one of the
Multi-function bays in the front of your
notebook. (See Multi-function Bay Devices
on pages 129-131.) If the battery is not charged
use a Power adapter until it is charged.
7. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify
the presence and condition of the batteries.
(See Figure 3-1 on page 28.) If a battery is
indicating a short, remove that battery and
operate from another power source or
replace that battery.
6. There is no battery installed and there is no
Power adapter (AC or auto/airline) installed.
7. The primary battery is installed but is faulty,
there is no optional second battery installed
and there is no Power adapter (AC or auto/
airline) installed.
161
Six
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 162
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Your notebook turns off all by itself.
162
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
8. The battery or batteries are low.
8. If the batteries are dead there will be a beep
when the power switch is turned on and the
notebook will immediately go into Dead
Battery Suspend mode. (See page 41.)
Check the Status Indicator panel to deter
mine the presence and condition of the –
batteries. (See Figure 3-2 on page 30.) Use a
Power adapter to operate until a battery is
charged or install a charged battery.
1. The power management parameters are set
for auto timeouts which are too short for
your operating needs.
1. Use the keyboard or pointer and if that does
not restore operation, push the Suspend/
Resume button. Check the power management
settings or close your applications and go to
the setup utility Power Savings menu and
adjust the timeout values to better suit
your operation needs.
2. You are operating on battery only and have
2. Install a Power adapter and then push the
ignored a low battery alarm until the batteries
Suspend/Resume button. (See Low Battery
are all at the dead battery state and your machine
State on page 41.)
has gone into Dead Battery Suspend mode.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:32 AM Page 163
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
3. You have a battery failure.
3. Verify the condition of the batteries using
the Status Indicator panel (Figure 3-2 on
page 30), and replace or remove any
that are shorted.
4. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the
outlet has power.
4. Your Power adapter has failed or lost
it’s power source.
Your notebook won’t work on battery alone.
1. The installed batteries are dead.
2. No batteries are installed.
3. The batteries are improperly installed.
4. Your installed batteries are faulty.
1. When the batteries are dead there will be a
beep when the power switch is turned on
and the notebook will immediately go into
Dead Battery Suspend mode. (See page 41.)
Replace the battery with a charged one or
install a Power adapter.
2. Install a charged battery. (See Multi-function
Bay Devices on pages 129-131.)
3. Verify that the batteries are properly
connected by re-installing them.
4. Verify the condition of the batteries using
the Status Indicator panel and replace or
remove any that are shorted.
163
Six
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 164
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
The batteries seem to discharge too quickly.
1. You are running an application which uses
a great deal of power because of frequent hard
drive access or CD-ROM/DVD access, use
of a modem card or of a LAN card.
2. The power savings features may be disabled.
1. Use both the primary battery and
an optional second battery and/or use a
Power adapter for this application when at
all possible.
2. Check the power management and/or setup
utility settings in the Power Savings menu
(see pages 107-112), and adjust according
to your operating needs.
3. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The
higher the brightness the more power your
display uses.
4. Replace the batteries.
5. Replace the batteries.
3. The brightness is turned all the way up.
4. The batteries are very old.
5. The batteries have been exposed to
high temperatures.
6. The batteries are too hot or too cold.
(See Batteries on page 26.)
6. Restore the notebook to normal operating
temperature. (The Charging icon on the
Status Indicator panel will flash when the
battery is outside its operating range.)
Shutdown and Startup Problems
The Suspend/Resume button does not work.
164
1. The Suspend/Resume button is disabled from
the Advanced submenu of the Power menu
of the setup utility.
1. Enable the button from the setup utility.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 165
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
2. You did not hold the button in long enough.
2. Hold the button longer. This may need to
be a few seconds if your application is
preventing the CPU from checking for
button pushes.
3. Close all applications, and try the
button again.
3. There may be a conflict with the
application software.
The system powers up, and displays
power on information, but fails to load
the operating system.
1. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility
are not compatible with your configuration.
2. You have a secured system requiring a
password to load your operating system.
3. Internal hard drive was not detected.
1. Set the operating source by pressing the Esc
key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use
the F2 key and enter the setup utility and
adjust the source settings from the Boot
menu on page 103.
2. Make sure you have the right password.
Enter the setup utility and verify the
Security settings and modify them as appropriate. (See Security Menu on pages 101-106.)
3. Use the BIOS setup utility Main menu,
Primary Master submenu to try to auto
detect the internal hard drive.
165
Six
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 166
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
An error message is displayed on the screen
during the notebook turn on (boot) sequence.
1. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected
a problem.
1. See the Power On Self Test (POST) Messages
(pages 170-172) to determine the meaning and
severity of the problem. Not all messages are
errors; some are simply status indicators.
Your notebook appears to change setup
parameters when you start it.
1. BIOS setup changes were not saved when
you made them and exited the BIOS setup
utility returning it to previous settings.
2. The BIOS CMOS hold-up battery has failed.
1. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit
when exiting the BIOS setup utility.
1. Something is pushing on the Closed
Cover switch. (See Figure 2-2 on page 15.)
2. The notebook is set for an external
monitor only.
1. Clear the Closed Cover switch.
2. Contact your support representative for
repairs. This is not a user serviceable part
but has a normal life of 3 to 5 years.
Video Problems
The built-in display is blank
when you turn on your notebook.
166
2. Pressing F10 while holding down the Fn key
allows you to change your selection of where
to send your display video. Each time you
press the combination of keys you will step
to the next choice. The choices, in order, are
built-in display only, external monitor only,
both built-in display and external monitor.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 167
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
3. The angle of the display and the brightness
settings are not adequate for your
lighting conditions.
4. The power management timeouts may be set
for very short intervals and you failed to
notice the display come on and go off again.
3. Move the display and the brightness control
until you have adequate visibility.
5. The notebook turned on with a series of beeps.
The display goes blank by itself after you
have been using it.
1. The notebook has gone into Video timeout,
Standby mode, Suspend mode or Save-to-Disk
mode because you have not used it for a
period of time.
2. Something is pushing on the Closed
Cover switch. (See Figure 2-2 on page 15.)
4. Press any key or move the pointer, if this
doesn’t work press the Suspend/Resume
button. (The display may be shut off
by Standby mode, Auto Suspend, or
Video Timeout.)
5. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a
failure which does not allow the display to
operate. Contact your support representative.
1. Use the keyboard or pointer and if
that does not restore operation, push
the Suspend/Resume button. You may
want to change your Power Management
settings (page 48) or close your application
and go to the setup utility Power Savings
menu (page 107) and adjust the timeout
values to better suit your operation needs.
2. Clear the Closed Cover switch.
Six
Problem
167
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 168
S e c t i o n
S i x
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
3. The power management timeouts may be set
for very short intervals and you failed to notice
the display come on and go off again.
3. Press any key or move the pointer,
if this doesn’t work press the
Suspend/Resume button.
The Built-in Display does not close.
1. A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck
between the display and the keyboard.
1. Remove all foreign objects from
the keyboard.
The Built-in Display has bright or dark spots.
1. If the spots are very tiny and few in number,
this is normal for a large LCD display.
2. If the spots are numerous or large enough to
interfere with your operation needs.
1. This is normal; do nothing.
The application display uses only a portion
of your screen and is surrounded by a dark frame.
168
1. You are running an application that does not
support 800 x 600 pixel resolution display
and display compression is enabled.
2. Display is faulty; contact your
support representative.
1. Display compression gives a clearer but
smaller display for applications that do not
support 800 x 600 pixel resolution. You can
fill the screen but have less resolution by
changing your display compression setting,
(See Video Features Submenu of the
Advanced Menu on pages 93.)
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 169
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Problem
Possible Cause
Possible Solution
You have connected an external monitor
and it does not come on.
1. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your
external monitor.
1. Try toggling the video destination by
pressing Fn and F10 together or check your
BIOS setup and enable your external monitor. (See the Video Features Submenu of the
Advanced Menu on page 93.)
2. Reinstall your device. (See External Monitor
on page 139.)
3 Check your device and operating system
documentation and activate the proper driver.
4. See your monitor documentation and the
External Monitor Support portions of
Appendix A on pages 182-185.
2. Your external monitor is not
properly installed.
3. Your operating system software is not setup
with the correct software driver for that device.
4. Your external monitor is not compatible
with your notebook.
An error message is displayed on the screen
during the operation of an application.
1. Application software often has its own
set of error message displays.
Six
Miscellaneous Problems
1. See your application manual and help
displays screens for more information.
Not all messages are errors; some may
simply be status.
169
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 170
S e c t i o n
S i x
POWER ON SELF TEST MESSAGES
The following is an alphabetic list of error-andstatus messages that Phoenix BIOS and/or your
operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are
marked with an *. Comments in italics are suggestions of possible actions for you to consider,
or risks resulting from ignoring the message.
The most common errors are marked with a #.
If an error message is displayed that is not in
this list, write it down and check your operating
system documentation both on screen and in
the manual. If you can find no reference to the
message and its meaning is not clear, contact
your support representative for assistance.
nnnn Cache SRAM Passed Where nnnn is the
amount of system cache in kilobytes successfully tested by the Power On Self Test. (This
can only appear if you have an SRAM PC
Card installed.)
*Diskette drive A error or Diskette drive
B error Drive A: or B: is present but fails the
BIOS Power On Self Test diskette tests. Check
170
to see that the drive is defined with the proper
diskette type in the Setup Utility, (see page 69)
and that the diskette drive is installed correctly.
If the disk drive is properly defined and
installed, avoid using it and contact your
support representative.
*Extended RAM Failed at offset: nnnn
Extended memory not working or not configured properly. If you have an installed memory
upgrade module, verify that the module is
properly installed. If it is properly installed, you
may want to check your Windows Setup to be
sure it is not using unavailable memory until
you can contact your support representative.
nnnn Extended RAM Passed Where nnnn
is the amount of memory in kilobytes
successfully tested.
*Failing Bits: nnnn The hex number nnnn
is a map of the bits at the memory address (in
System, Extended, or Shadow memory) which
failed the memory test. Each 1 (one) in the map
indicates a failed bit. This is a serious fault that
might cause you to lose data if you continue.
Contact your support representative.
*Fixed Disk x Failure or Fixed Disk Controller
Failure (where x = 1-4) Fixed disk is not working or not configured properly. This may mean
that the hard drive type identified in your Setup
Utility does not agree with the type detected by
the Power On Self Test. Run the Setup Utility
to check for the hard drive type settings and
correct them if necessary. If the settings are
OK and the message appears when you restart
the system, there may be a serious fault which
might cause you to lose data if you continue.
Contact your support representative.
*Incorrect Drive A type – run SETUP Type of
floppy drive A: not correctly identified in Setup.
This means that the floppy disk drive type identified in your Setup Utility does not agree with
the type detected by the Power On Self Test. Run
the Setup Utility to correct the inconsistency.
*Incorrect Drive B type – run SETUP Type of
floppy drive B: not correctly identified in Setup.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 171
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
This means that the floppy disk drive type identified in your Setup Utility does not agree with
the type detected by the Power On Self Test. Run
the Setup Utility to correct the inconsistency.
*Invalid NVRAM media type Problem with
NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you
see this message you may have some display
problems. You can continue operating but
should contact your support representative for
more information.
*Keyboard controller error The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to replace your
keyboard or keyboard controller but may be
able to use an external keyboard until then.
Contact your support representative.
*Keyboard error Keyboard not working. You
may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard
controller but may be able to use an external
keyboard until then. Contact your support
representative.
*Keyboard error nn BIOS discovered a stuck
key and displays the scan code for the stuck key.
You may have to replace your keyboard but may
be able to use an external keyboard until then.
Contact your support representative.
the address, it displays ????. This is a potentially
data destroying failure. Contact your support
representative.
*Monitor type does not match CMOS – Run
SETUP Monitor type not correctly identified in
Setup. This error probably means your BIOS is
corrupted, run the Setup Utility and set all settings to the default conditions. If you still get
this error, contact your support representative.
*Parity Check 2 nnnn Parity error found in the
I/O bus. BIOS attempts to locate the address
and display it on the screen. If it cannot locate
the address, it displays ????. This is a potentially
data destroying failure. Contact your support
representative.
#*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or
drive C: Enter the Setup Utility and see if fixed
disk and drive A: are properly identified and
that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless
you have changed your installation greatly, the
operating system should be on drive C:. If the
setup utility is correctly set your hard drive is
probably corrupted and your system may have
to be re-installed from your back up media.
#*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP is
displayed after any recoverable error message.
Press the F1 key to continue the boot process
or the F2 key to enter Setup and change
any settings.
*Parity Check 1 nnnn Parity error found in the
system bus. BIOS attempts to locate the address
and display it on the screen. If it cannot locate
#*Previous boot incomplete – Default configuration used Previous Power On Self Test did
not complete successfully. Power On Self Test
loads default values and offers to run Setup. If
the failure was caused by incorrect values and
they are not corrected, the next boot will likely
fail also. If using the default settings does not
allow you to complete a successful boot
171
Six
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 172
S e c t i o n
S i x
sequence, you should turn off the power
with the Power Switch and contact your
support representative.
*Real time clock error Real-time clock fails
BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact
your support representative.
*Shadow RAM Failed at offset: nnnn Shadow
RAM failed at offset nnnn of the 64k block at
which the error was detected. You are risking
data corruption if you continue. Contact your
support representative.
nnnn Shadow RAM Passed Where nnnn is the
amount of shadow RAM in kilobytes successfully tested.
*System battery is dead – Replace and run
SETUP The BIOS CMOS RAM memory hold
up battery is dead. This is part of your BIOS
and is a board mounted battery which requires
a support representative to change. You can
continue operating but you will have to use
Setup Utility default values or reconfigure your
Setup Utility every time you turn off your
172
notebook. This battery has an expected life
of 2 to 3 years.
System BIOS shadowed System BIOS copied to
shadow RAM.
*System CMOS checksum bad – run SETUP
BIOS CMOS RAM has been corrupted or
modified incorrectly, perhaps by an application
program that changes data stored in BIOS
memory. Run Setup and reconfigure the system.
*System RAM Failed at offset: nnnn System
memory failed at offset nnnn of in the 64k
block at which the error was detected. This
means that there is a fault in your built-in
memory. If you continue to operate you risk
corrupting your data. Contact your support
representative for repairs.
nnnn System RAM Passed Where nnnn is the
amount of system memory in kilobytes successfully tested.
*System timer error The timer test failed. The
main clock that operates the computer is faulty.
Requires repair of system board. Contact your
support representative for repairs.
UMB upper limit segment address: nnnn
Displays the address of the upper limit of
Upper Memory Blocks, indicating released
segments of the BIOS memory which may
be reclaimed by a virtual memory manager.
Video BIOS shadowed Video BIOS successfully
copied to shadow RAM.
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 173
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Figure 6-1 Emergency CD-ROM/DVD Tray Release
EMERGENCY CD-ROM/DVD
TRAY RELEASE
If for some reason the eject button fails, you
can open the CD-ROM/DVD tray with a paper
clip or similar tool inserted into the eject hole
in the far right side of the front of the tray.
Straighten one side of a paper clip and push it
gently into the hole. The tray will pop out a
short distance.
The operating system and application software
that is factory installed detects the modem
characteristics and provides the necessary command strings to operate the modem. The internal modem operation is controlled by generic
AT commands from the operating system and
application software. The standard long form
result codes may, in some cases, be displayed on
your screen to keep you informed of the actions
of your modem. The operating system and
application software may suppress display of
the result codes.
Examples of result codes are:
OK
NO CARRIER
NO DIALTONE
CONNECT 56000
(Connection complete at 56,000 bps.)
ERROR
FAX
RING (This means an incoming call.)
BUSY
NO ANSWER
When using the internal modem with applications which are not factory installed see the
application documentation.
Six
MODEM SETUP AND COMMANDS
173
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 174
S e c t i o n
S i x
RECOVERY CD-ROM
Included with your notebook (in the
Accessories box) is an Emergency Recovery
CD-ROM with the following content:
A backup copy of the software originally
installed on your new Fujitsu LifeBook (can
only be used on the listed LifeBook models).
Sets of device drivers and utilities (in specific
directories) that are unique to your notebook
configuration for use as documented below.
Read-me files that provide additional use
information for items on this CD-ROM.
If you have access to the internet, visit the
Fujitsu PC Corporation Web Site at
www.8fujitsu.com to check for the most
current information and hints on how to
perform recovery and system updates.
Restoring Your Pre-installed Software from
CD-ROM
The Emergency Recovery CD-ROM enables
restoration of your notebook disk drive contents as they were originally shipped from the
174
factory. Most often this is necessary if files or
software programs (only those files/programs
that came pre-installed) become corrupt or
accidentally erased.
You have two options available when
performing recovery:
1. Recover Hard Drive without Format. This
choice replaces all the original factory
installed files and program structures without
eliminating your data files. You will have to
re-install any software that was not included
with the computer when you bought it (but
your data will be intact as long as the installation of the additional programs is performed
in the same manner).
2. Format and Recover Hard Drive. This choice
removes all the information on the hard disk.
If you choose this option, you will lose any
software you have installed and any other
files you created since you setup your computer. You will have to re-install any software
that was not included with the computer
when you bought it.
POINT
It is recommended that you back-up all
data files prior to performing either of
the recovery options.
POINT
Make certain you have your Operating
System Product ID # available (from the
Certificate of Authenticity) prior to performing recovery. Once the process is
complete and you re-start your notebook, you will be required to perform all
the setup steps as when the computer
was first bought. (see the section Starting
Your LifeBook for the First Time).
CAUTION
User data and user installed software
CAN NOT be recovered from the
Emergency Recovery CD
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 175
LifeBook C Series from Fujitsu
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
1. Insert the Emergency Recovery CD in the
CD-ROM drive.
2. If your notebook is running when you insert
the CD, exit your operating system and
power down the notebook.
3. Start (power up) your notebook.
tem run a full virus scan of the hard drive
and then reach the Emergency Recovery
Welcome screen. If this is not what is displayed, check to see that the Recovery CD is
installed in the CD-ROM drive and repeat
the previous steps (starting with 2.).
If you received a message “This program
may not be used on your computer” you are
using the wrong Recovery CD for the model
of notebook.
6. Read the information displayed on the
Welcome screen, then Click OK.
4. At this point, you must either change you
BIOS setup configuration (F2 key) to have
the computer boot from the CD-ROM “first”
(if you have not previously done so), or use
the Esc key during this boot-up sequence and
select the CD-ROM from the menu which
will appear. (For more information and
detailed instructions on changing the BIOS
setup, refer to Section Four of this manual.)
7. Select one of the two icons displayed in the
Emergency Recovery menu and follow the
instructions that follow.
5. If correctly configured to boot from the
Recovery CD-ROM, you will notice your sys-
10. Reset your boot device priority in the BIOS
setup as desired.
8. When recovery is complete, remove the
Recovery CD, replace it in its sleeve and store
it in a safe location (with your Operating
System Manual/Certificate of Authenticity).
Your notebook now has all of the software
installed that was included when you received it
from the factory. You must now load any programs which you purchased and installed after
you got your notebook. If you chose the Format
and Recover option, you should now restore
your data files. If you performed Recovery without format, your data files will still exist (within
their original directory structures).
POINT
As long as there is no bootable disk in
the CD-ROM drive or the floppy disk
drive, your notebook will boot from the
hard drive regardless of the BIOS Boot
Device Priority setting.
Six
To Run the Emergency Recovery Program
To use this portion of the CD-ROM, your notebook must BOOT (upon power up or full system reset/restart) from the CD-ROM drive.
(See Section Four, page 68.)
9. Restart your notebook.
175
I Six Troubleshooting.qxd 10/28/98 10:33 AM Page 176
S e c t i o n
S i x
Device Drivers, Utilities and Read-me Files
The Emergency Recovery CD also includes a
section for providing device driver files/directories and specific Lifebook model utilities that
give you additional flexibility and functionality
for using your Fujitsu notebook.
This section of the CD is only available if your
notebook is already functioning from either
your hard drive boot/operating system or as a
result of using a bootable floppy disk that is
configured to recognize the CD-ROM drive.
Please locate and read any of the Read-Me files
that are included on the CD. These files will
provide information that pertains specifically to
the additional files and utilities that are provided on the Recovery CD for your particular
Lifebook model.
176
CAUTION
Do not boot your notebook from the
CD-ROM drive as is done for restoring
your pre-installed software.
POINT
Look for and open files with the
extensions .DOC and .TXT
J Seven Care_Maintain.qxd 10/28/98 10:35 AM Page 177
S e c t i o n
Care and Maintenance
Caring for Your Notebook . . . . . . . . . . 178
Increasing Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Caring for Your Batteries . . . . . . . . . . 179
S e v e n
J Seven Care_Maintain.qxd 10/28/98 10:35 AM Page 178
S e c t i o n
S e v e n
1. Turn it off.
2. Position it so that the liquid can run out.
3. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer
if needed.
4. If your notebook will not boot after it has
dried out, call your support representative.
SECTION SEVEN
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
If you use your LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
carefully, you will increase its life and reliability.
This section provides some tips for looking
after the notebook and the battery packs.
CARING FOR YOUR NOTEBOOK
■
The LifeBook E Series is a durable but
sensitive electronic device. Treat it with
respect and care.
■
Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable
carrying case.
Keep it away from food and beverages.
If you accidentally spill liquid on
your notebook:
178
Avoid exposure to water, sand, dust, and
other environmental hazards.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Do not expose your notebook to direct
sunlight for long periods of time as
temperatures above 140° F (60° C) may
damage your notebook.
Keep the covers closed on the connectors and
slots when they are not in use.
Do not put heavy or sharp objects on
the computer.
If you are carrying your notebook in a briefcase, or any other carrying case, make sure
that there are no objects in the case pressing
on the lid of your notebook.
Do not drop your notebook.
Clean your notebook with a damp, lint-free
cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents.
Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen.
Never use glass cleaners on your notebook.
J Seven Care_Maintain.qxd 10/28/98 10:35 AM Page 179
LifeBook 700 Series from Fujitsu
C a r e
a n d
M a i n t e n a n c e
INCREASING BATTERY LIFE
CARING FOR YOUR BATTERIES
To increase battery life:
If your notebook is to be stored for a month
or longer, turn the machine off and remove
all Lithium ion batteries. Store your notebook
and batteries separately in a cool, dry location.
If you store your notebook with a battery
installed, the battery will discharge, and battery
life will be reduced. In addition, a faulty battery
might damage your notebook.
1. Power your notebook through the
AC or optional auto/airline adapter
whenever possible.
2. If your notebook is running on battery power
all day, connect it to the AC adapter
overnight to recharge the battery.
3. Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable.
4. Set the power management for maximum
battery life.
5. Put your notebook in Suspend mode when it
is turned on and you are not actually using it.
6. Limit your CD-ROM access.
Seven
7. Disable the Windows CD automatic
insertion function.
8. Always use fully charged batteries.
179
J Seven Care_Maintain.qxd 10/28/98 10:35 AM Page 180
S e c t i o n
180
S e v e n
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 181
A p p e n d i c e s
Specifications and Glossary
Appendix A Specifications . . . . . . . . . 182
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
LifeBook E Series Specifications . . . . . . . 182
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Popular Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Appendix B Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 182
A p p e n d i c e s
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix A provides the hardware and environmental specifications and the model and
part numbers for your LifeBook E Series
and its peripherals.
WARRANTY
Your notebook is backed by a three year
International Limited Warranty and includes
toll-free technical support; call 1-800-8FUJITSU
(1-800-838-5487). Check the service kit that
came with your notebook for warranty terms
and conditions.
LIFEBOOK E SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Microprocessor
E330/E335
Intel Pentium II 233MHz, PCI bus architecture,
and CardBus architecture.
E340
Intel Pentium II 266MHz, PCI bus architecture,
and CardBus architecture.
E350
Intel Pentium II 300MHz, PCI bus architecture,
and CardBus architecture.
182
Memory
System Memory (on-board)
32MB SDRAM.
L2 Cache Memory
512KB.
Expansion Memory Options
16MB, 32MB, 64MB and 128MB SDRAM
Modules extend system memory up to 160MB
maximum; installable in a single DIMM (dualin-line memory module) slot in a compartment
in the bottom of the notebook.
Fujitsu product numbers:
16MB SDRAM, FPCEM05.
32MB SDRAM, FPCEM06.
64MB SDRAM, FPCEM07.
128MB SDRAM, FPCEM08.
BIOS Memory
512KB Flash ROM.
256 Bytes CMOS-RAM with back-up battery.
Video RAM
2MB EDO RAM.
Display
Built-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LCD
display with simultaneous display capability.
Recommended Video Color and Resolution
E330
Diagonal dimension: 12.1."
Internal
800 x 600 pixel resolution, 256k colors.
(Select 16M colors on Window
Display setting)
External
1024 x 768 pixel resolution, 64k colors.
800 x 600 pixel resolution, 16M colors.
Simultaneous Video = Yes
800 x 600, 256 colors
SVGA, and VGA compatible.
E335/E340/E350
Diagonal dimension: 13.3."
Internal
1024 x 768 pixel resolution, 64k colors.
800 x 600 pixel resolution, 256k colors.
(Select 16M colors on Window
Display setting)
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 183
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
A p p e n d i c e s
E350
One factory installed 5.0GB, 2.5" fixed hard
drive unit.
Optional modular 5.0GB, 2.5" hard drive
unit, Fujitsu Model FPCHDD17.
Mass Storage Device Options
Multi-function Device Bays
Two hot-swappable.
CD-ROM Drive
Included modular, 24x maximum, 5.25"
CD-ROM drive, Fujitsu Model FPCCD09.
Floppy Disk Drive
Included modular 3.5" floppy disk drive which
accommodates 1.44MB or 720KB floppy
disks, Fujitsu Model FPCFDD05.
Optional modular SuperDisk 120 Super floppy
disk drive which accomodates 120MB Super
floppy disks and standard 3.5" floppy disks,
Fujitsu Model FPCLS02
DVD Drive
Optional modular, DVD Media 2x max, CD
Media 20x max, 5.25" DVD-ROM drive,
Fujitsu Model FPCDV04.
Hard Drive
E330/E335
One factory installed 3.2GB, 2.5" fixed hard
drive unit.
E340
One factory installed 4.0GB, 2.5" fixed hard
drive unit.
Audio
SoundBlaster Pro-compatible 16-bit stereo
PCM/FM sound chip.
Spatializer 3D-Stereo multiple speaker effect
support.
Stereo headphone jack, 1 Vrms, or less,
minimum impedance 32 Ohms.
Stereo line in jack, 880 mVrms or less,
minimum impedance 10K Ohms.
Mono microphone jack, 125 mVp-p or less,
minimum impedance 10K Ohms.
Two built-in speakers, 28 mm diameter (Stereo).
One built-in monaural microphone.
Integrated Pointing Device
ErgoTrac pointing device (standard)
Touchpad pointing device (custom)
Communication Options
Internal V.90 standard 56K fax/modem
(ITU V.90, 56K data, 14.4K fax.)
(See page 3 for caution on modem.)
or
Internal Fast Ethernet (10/100 Base-Tx)
network interface card with RJ-45 connector.
IrDA 1.1 compatible fast infrared port (4 Mbps).
Video
MPEG-1 video data decompression software.
Zoomed Video support via PC Card Slot 1.
Battery Adapter for Bay 2
Battery adapter for Bay 2,
Fujitsu Model FPCBYA02.
Floppy Disk Drive Adapter
Adapter for external installation of modular
floppy disk drive, Fujitsu Model FPCFDA03.
183
Appendices
External
1024 x 768 pixel resolution, 64k colors.
800 x 600 pixel resolution, 16M colors.
Simultaneous Video = Yes
124 x 768, 64K color
XGA, SVGA, and VGA compatible.
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 184
A p p e n d i c e s
Input/Output Connections
One Type III/two Type I/II PC Card slot:
PCMCIA Standard 2.1 with CardBus
support; Zoomed Video support via Slot 1.
One 6-pin mini DIN PS/2 compatible connector, for external keyboard, external mouse or
external numeric keypad.
One 25-pin D-SUB two-way Centronics type
connector for parallel input/output devices;
Bi-directional, output only or ECP.
One 240-pin connector for docking devices.
One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external
monitor (see Display specifications).
One 9-pin D-SUB connector for RS-232C serial
input/output devices.
One connector for USB (Universal Serial Bus)
input/output devices.
One 25-pin special connector for external
floppy disk drive connection.
One modular RJ-11 or RJ-45 communications
connector.
One stereo headphone jack.
(See Audio specifications.)
184
One mono microphone jack.
(See Audio specifications.)
One stereo line in jack.
(See Audio specifications.)
Keyboards
Built-in keyboard with all functions of 101 key
PS/2 compatible keyboards.
Total number of keys: 86.
Function keys: 12, F1 through F12.
Feature extension key: Fn.
Windows keys: 3, two Start keys and
one Application key.
Key pitch: 19 mm.
Key stroke: 3 mm.
Built-in ErgoTrac pointing device with
left and right buttons.
Built-in palmrest.
External Keyboard Support
PS/2 compatible.
External Numeric Keypad Support
PS/2 compatible.
External Mouse Support
PS/2 compatible.
Management Standard
DMI 2.0/WFM 2.0 Compliant.
Power
Batteries
One modular Lithium ion battery, Fujitsu
Model FPCBP14. Rechargeable, 10.8V, 3600
mAh. Operating time of up to 3 hours. Rapid
charge (notebook off or in suspend mode) in
about three (3) hours. Standard charge (normal
use with limited CD and hard drive access)
in about nine (9) hours.
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 185
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
A p p e n d i c e s
Actual battery life will vary based on
screen brightness, applications, features,
power management settings, battery
conditioning, and other customer
preferences. CD-ROM or hard drive
usage may also have a significant impact
on battery life.
Dual Battery Configuration
Operating time of up to 6 hours. Rapid charge
(notebook off or in Suspend Mode) in about
five (5) hours. Standard charge (normal use
with limited CD and hard drive access) in
about fifteen (15) hours.
AC Adapter
Autosensing 100-240V AC, 43W, supplying
16V DC to the Notebook, Fujitsu Model
FPCAC05 which includes an AC cable.
Optional Auto/Airline Adapter
Autosensing 12/24V DC, 43W supplying
16V DC to the Notebook, Fujitsu
Model FPCCAA02.
Humidity
Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing.
Non-operating; 8% to 85%, relative,
non-condensing.
Power Management
Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration
and Power Interface) version 1.0.
Altitude
Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum.
Dimensions and Weight
Overall Dimensions
Approximately 11.7" x 9.7" x 2.3"
(297 mm x 246 mm x 58 mm).
Weights
Approximately 6.5 lbs (Battery with
Weight Saver).
Approximately 6.94 lbs (FDD and Battery).
Approximately 7.2 lbs (CD-ROM and Battery).
Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
9 kV.
Theft Prevention Lock
Lock slot on the right side panel for use with
physical restraining security systems. The locking system by Kensington is recommended.
Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Operating: 5° to 35° C (41° to 95° F).
Non-operating: –15° to 60° C (5° to 140° F).
Appendices
CAUTION
185
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 186
A p p e n d i c e s
Pre-Installed Software
Tioman HotSwap by Agaté Technologies.
SoftPEG by CompCore Multimedia Inc.
Audio Rack 32 by ESS Technology, Inc.
PMSet 98 by Fujitsu Limited.
Microsoft Windows 95, 98 or NT 4.0.
McAfee VirusScan by Network Associates, Inc.
Card Executive by Phoenix Technologies.
NoteDock by Phoenix Technologies.
PowerPanel by Phoenix Technologies.
LapLink by Traveling Software.
PC-Doctor by Watergate Software, Inc.
APPROVALS
Emissions
FCC Part 15, FCC Part 68, FTZ.
Safety
UL, C-UL, CSA.
FCC Certification
See statement at the front of this User’s Guide.
DOC (Industry Canada) Certification
See statement at the front of this User’s Guide.
186
POPULAR ACCESSORIES
Other accessories are available, contact your
authorized Fujitsu reseller.
Optional second modular Lithium ion battery,
Fujitsu Model FPCBP11.
Optional modular 5.0GB hard drive, Fujitsu
Model FPCHDD15.
Optional Floppy Disk Drive Adapter for
external FDD connection FPCFDA03.
LANdock, Fujitsu Model FPCDS18. The
LANdock provides connections for:
RS-232C Serial device.
Parallel device.
VGA/SVGA/XGA monitor.
Mouse (PS/2).
Keyboard (PS/2).
Slot for Two Type II/one Type III PC Cards
without Zoomed Video support.
Telephone line (RJ-11).
10/100 Base-T Ethernet line (RJ-45).
MIDI/joystick device.
Two USB devices.
External floppy disk drive.
Stereo Headphone.
Microphone.
Stereo Line In.
Port Replicator, Fujitsu Model FPCPR10. The
Port Replicator provides connections for:
RS-232C Serial device.
Parallel device.
VGA/SVGA/XGA monitor.
Mouse (PS/2).
Keyboard (PS/2).
Telephone line (RJ-11).
Two USB devices.
External floppy disk drive.
Microphone.
Stereo Line In.
Iomega Zip Drive.
SuperDisk™ 120 drive.
Battery Charger.
External FDD.
Modular FDD Adapter.
Various RAM memory upgrades.
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 187
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
A p p e n d i c e s
AC Adapter
A device which converts the AC voltage from a
wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power
your Computer.
ACPI 1.0
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface
specification version 1.0. Conforming systems
contain BIOS support to allow the Windows 98
operating systems to manage power consumption of system components.
Active-Matrix Display
A type of technology for making flat-panel displays which has a transistor or similar device
for every pixel on the screen.
Auto/Airline Adapter
A device which converts the DC voltage from
an automobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC
power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power
your notebook.
BIOS
Basic Input-Output System. A computer program and set of default parameters stored in
ROM which tests and operates your computer
when you turn it on until it loads your installed
operating system from disk. Information from
the BIOS is transferred to the installed operating system to provide it with information on
the configuration and status of the hardware.
Byte
8 bits of parallel binary information.
Bit
An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of
information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0).
CardBus
A faster, 32-bit version of the PC Card interface
which offers performance similar to the 32-bit
PCI architecture.
bps
An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to
describe data transfer rates.
Boot
To start-up a computer and load its operating
system from disk, ROM or other storage media
into RAM.
Bus
An electrical circuit which passes data
between the CPU and the sub-assemblies
inside your computer.
Cache Memory
A block of memory built into the microprocessor which is much faster to access than
your system RAM and used in specially structured ways to make your overall data handling
time faster.
CD-ROM
Compact disc read only memory. This is a form
of digital data storage which is read optically
with a laser rather than a magnetic head. A
typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB of
data and is not subject to heads crashing into
the surface and destroying the data when there
is a failure nor to wear from reading.
187
Appendices
APPENDIX B GLOSSARY
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 188
A p p e n d i c e s
CHS Translation
Cylinder, head and sector translation.
Conversion of hard drive access addressing to
the cylinder, head and sector form. The terminology is historical left from the days when data
was stored on a series of cylindrical drums. The
head designates the reading device, similar to
the head on a cassette recorder only mounted
on a movable arm. Another addressing
method is LBA.
Configuration
The combination of hardware and software that
makes up your system and how it is allocated
for use.
CMOS RAM
Complementary metal oxide semiconductor
random access memory. This is a technology for
manufacturing random access memory which
requires very low levels of power to operate.
Data
The information a system stores and processes.
COM Port
Abbreviation for communication port.
This is your serial interface connection.
Default Value
A preprogrammed value to be used if you fail to
set your own.
Command
An instruction which you give your operating
system. Example: run a particular application
or format a floppy disk.
DIMM
Dual-in-line memory module.
188
CRT
Cathode Ray Tube. A display device which uses
a beam of electronic particles striking a luminescent screen. It produces a visual image by
varying the position and intensity of the beam.
DC
Direct current. A voltage or current that does
not fluctuate periodically with time.
Disk
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage
media. If the platter is very stiff it is a hard
drive, if it is highly flexible it is a floppy disk,
if it is a floppy disk in a hard housing with
a shutter it is commonly called a diskette.
Disk Drive
The hardware which spins the disk and has the
heads and control circuitry for reading and
writing the data on the disk.
Diskette
A floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter.
DMA
Direct Memory Access. Special circuitry for
memory to memory transfers of data which do
not require CPU action.
DMI
Desktop Management Interface. A standard
that provides PC management applications
with a common method of locally or remotely
querying and configuring PC computer
systems, hardware and software components,
and peripherals.
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 189
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
A p p e n d i c e s
Driver
A computer program which converts application and operating system commands to external devices into the exact form required by
a specific brand and model of device in order
to produce the desired results from that
particular equipment.
ECP
Extended Capability Port. A set of standards for
high speed data communication and interconnection between electronic devices.
ESD
Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge
of electricity from a static charge which has
built-up slowly. Example: the shock you get
from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks
you get from brushing hair on a dry day.
Extended Memory
All memory more than the 640KB recognized
by MS-DOS as system memory.
FCC
Federal Communication Commission.
Floppy Disk
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage
media which is highly flexible.
I/O Port
The connector and associated control circuits
for data entering and leaving your computer
in electronic form.
GB
Gigabyte.
IDE
Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control
interface for a hard drive which is inside the
hard drive unit.
Gigabyte
1,073,741,824 bytes
(2 raised to the thirtieth power).
Impedance
The amount of resistance to the flow of
electric current.
Hard drive
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage
media where the platter is very stiff.
Infrared
Light just beyond the red portion of the visible
light spectrum which is invisible to humans.
Hexadecimal
A decimal notation for the value of a 4 bit
binary number. (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F) Example:
2F in hexadecimal = 00101111 in binary = 47
in decimal.
IR
An abbreviation for infrared.
I/O
Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your
computer in electronic form.
IrDA
Infrared Data Association. An organization
which produces standards for communication
using infrared as the carrier.
189
Appendices
DOS
Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft
Disk Operating System).
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 190
A p p e n d i c e s
IRQ
Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hardware signal to the CPU that an external event
has occurred which needs to be processed.
Lithium ion Battery
A type of rechargeable battery which has a high
power-time life for its size and is not subject to
the memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries.
KB
Kilobyte.
LPT Port
Line Printer Port. A way of referring to parallel
interface ports because historically line printers
were the first and latter the most common
device connected to parallel ports.
Kilobyte
1,024 bytes (2 raised to the tenth power).
LAN
Local Area Network. An interconnection of
computers and peripherals within a single
limited geographic location which can pass
programs and data amongst themselves.
LBA
Logical Block Addressing. A method of locating
data stored on a disk.
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which
makes images by controlling the orientation of
crystals in a crystalline liquid.
190
MB
Megabyte.
Megabyte
1,048,576 bytes
(2 raised to the twentieth power).
Megahertz
1,000,000 cycles per second.
Memory
A repository for data and applications which is
readily accessible to your computer CPU.
MHz
Megahertz.
MIDI
Musical Instrument Digital Interface. A standard communication protocol for exchange of
information between computers and sound
producers such as synthesizers.
Modem
A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator.
The equipment which connects a computer or
other data terminal to a communication line.
MMX Technology
MMX technology is an Intel processor enhancement that improves multimedia and communication applications. The Pentium processor with
MMX technology boasts three primary architectural design enhancements: 57 powerful new
instructions specifically designed to manipulate
and process video, audio and graphical data efficiently; Single Instruction Multiple Data (SIMD)
enabling one instruction to perform the same
function on multiple pieces of data; and more
L1 cache for a total of 32KB.
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 191
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
A p p e n d i c e s
MPU-401
A standard for MIDI interfaces and connectors.
NTSC
National TV Standards Commission. The
standard for TV broadcast and reception for
the USA.
Operating System
A group of control programs that convert
application commands, including driver
programs, into the exact form required by a
specific brand and model of microprocessor
in order to produce the desired results from
that particular equipment.
PAL
Phase Alternation by Line. The standard for
color television in Western Europe and most of
Asia and Africa.
Parallel Port
A connection to another device through which
data is transferred as a block of bits simultaneously with a wire for each bit in the block and
with other wires only for control of the device
not for transfer of data.
PIO
Parallel Input/Output.
Partition
A block of space on a hard drive which is set
aside and made to appear to the operating system as if it were a separate disk, and addressed
by the operating system accordingly.
Pixel
The smallest element of a display, a dot of color
on your display screen. The more pixels per
area the clearer your image will appear.
Pitch (keyboard)
The distance between the centers of the letter
keys of a keyboard.
PCMCIA
PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal
Computer Memory Card International
Association. The Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association is an organization that sets standards for add-in cards for
personal computers.
POST
Power On Self Test. A program which is part of
the BIOS which checks the configuration and
operating condition of your hardware whenever
power is applied to your Computer. Status and
error messages may be displayed before the operating system is loaded. If the self test detects failures that are so serious that operation can not
continue, the operating system will not be loaded.
Peripheral Device
A piece of equipment which performs a specific
function associated with but not integral to
a computer. Examples: a printer, a modem,
a CD-ROM.
Program
An integrated set of coded commands to your
computers telling your hardware what to do
and how and when to do it.
191
Appendices
Monaural
A system using one channel to process sound
from all sources.
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 192
A p p e n d i c e s
PS/2
An IBM series of personal computers which
established a number of standards for connecting external devices such as keyboards
and monitors.
Resume
To proceed after interruption. In your
Computer this refers to returning to active
operation after having been in one of the
suspension states.
Serial Port
A connection to another device through which
data is transferred one bit at a time on a single
wire with any other wires only for control of
the device not for transfer of data.
RAM
Random Access Memory. A hardware component of your computer that holds binary information (both program and data) as long as it
has the proper power applied to it.
ROM
Read Only Memory. A form of memory in
which information is stored by physically altering the material. Data stored in this way can not
be changed by your Computer and does not
require power to maintain it.
Shadow RAM
A technique of copying data or applications
stored in ROM (Read Only Memory) into RAM
(Random Access Memory) for access during
actual operation. RAM is much faster to access
than ROM, however ROM contents are not lost
when power is removed. Shadowing allows
permanently stored information to be
rapidly accessed.
RAM Module
A printed circuit card with memory and associated circuitry which allows the user to add
additional memory to the computer without
special tools.
Reset
The act of reloading the operating system.
A reset erases all information stored in RAM.
Restart
See Reset.
192
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface (pronounced
scuzzy). An American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) standard for connecting
multiple (up to 7) high speed parallel
devices to a computer.
SDRAM
Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory.
SRAM
Static random access memory. A specific technology of making RAM which does not require
periodic data refreshing.
Status Indicator
A display which reports the condition of some
portion of your hardware. On your Computer
this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard.
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 193
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
A p p e n d i c e s
Stroke (keyboard)
The amount of travel of a key when it is pressed
from resting to fully depressed.
Suspend
To make inoperative for a period of time. Your
notebook uses various suspension states to
reduce power consumption and prolong the
charge of your battery.
SVGA
Super VGA.
S-Video
Super Video. A component video system for
driving a TV or computer monitor.
System Clock
An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which
synchronizes the operation of the system and
is counted to provide time of day and date.
TFT
Thin Film Transistor – A technology for flat
display panels which uses a thin film matrix of
transistors to control each pixel of the display
screen individually.
UL
Underwriters Laboratories – An independent
organization that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices.
VGA
Video Graphics Array. A video display standard
originally introduced by IBM with the PS/2
series of personal computers.
XGA
Extended VGA.
Zip Drive
A 100MB read/write removable media
disk drive.
Zoomed Video
A PC Card port which allows notebook PCs
to deliver full screen broadcast quality video
through third party PC Cards, including
TV tuners, video capture, and MPEG
full-motion video.
VRAM
Video Random Access Memory. A memory
dedicated to video display data and control.
Write Protect
Prevent alteration of the binary state of all bits
in a storage media. Example: all information
on a device such as a floppy diskette; a block
of space in a storage media such as a partition
of a hard drive; a file or directory of floppy
diskette or hard drive.
Appendices
Stereo (audio)
A system using two channels to process sound
from two different sources.
193
K Appendicies_Glossary.qxd 10/28/98 10:39 AM Page 194
A p p e n d i c e s
194
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 195
Index
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 196
I n d e x
3D-Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 54
AC adapter . . . . . . . . 2, 9, 14, 16, 25, 28–29,
38–41, 62, 140, 154
AC Adapter indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Access indicators. . . . . . . . 24, 29, 31, 49–50
Adjustment feet . . . . . . . 11, 15, 44–45, 144
Advanced Menu. . . . . . 54, 67, 81–84, 86–88,
90, 92, 94, 96, 98–99, 152, 168–169
Applications . . . . . . 24–25, 29–30, 39, 46–47,
125, 137, 140, 152, 162, 165, 168, 173
Arrow icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Audio functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 91
Auto Suspend Timeout . . . . . . . . . 109, 112
Automatic insertion function . . . . 30, 45, 179
Batteries. . . . . 5, 14–15, 25, 27, 29–30, 38–41,
49, 53, 69, 129, 133–134, 159–164, 177, 179
Battery . . . . . 2–5, 7–8, 14–16, 28–30, 38–41,
48–49, 51, 55–60, 62, 64–65, 111–112, 129–130,
133–134, 144, 159–164, 166, 172, 177–179
Boot Sector Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Battery Level indicator . . . . . . 29–30, 40–41
Bootable CD-ROM. . . . . . . . . . 69, 78, 155
Battery life . . . . . 15, 39, 56–58, 112, 177, 179
Booting . . . . . . . . 17, 19–20, 70, 78, 90, 116
Battery power . . . . . 7, 14, 48, 51, 57, 62, 111
Bridge battery . . . . . . 5, 38–39, 111, 133–134
Bi-directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Brightness. . . . . 6–7, 15, 39, 48, 164, 167, 179
BIOS . . . . . . 7, 16–17, 19–20, 33, 48, 50–54,
56–58, 67–71, 74, 76, 78, 82, 84–88, 92,
96–98, 103–104, 115, 118, 120, 122–123,
152–153, 155–158, 165–166, 169–172, 175
Cache Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
BIOS setup utility . . . . . 7, 16–17, 19–20, 48,
50–54, 56–58, 67–69, 71, 84,
103, 118, 152, 156, 165–166
CardBus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Block Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Boot . . . . . . . . . 16, 20, 33, 67–71, 78, 100,
102, 104, 106, 115–118, 150,
165–166, 171, 175–176, 178
Boot device. . . . . . . . . . . 69, 116–118, 175
196
Boot sequence . . 67–68, 78, 150, 165–166, 171
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
CapsLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 28, 31
CD automatic insertion function . . 30, 45, 179
CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CD-ROM . . . . . . 2–4, 7–8, 15, 22, 24, 27–28,
30–31, 38–40, 44–46, 53, 55, 59–60,
63–64, 68–69, 76, 78, 118, 128–129,
132, 149, 151–153, 155, 164, 173–176, 179
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 197
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
CD-ROM access. . . . . . . . . . . 30, 153, 179
CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 94
DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 141
CD-ROM drive. . . 2–4, 7–8, 15, 27–28, 30–31,
38–39, 44, 59–60, 64, 69, 76, 118,
128–129, 132, 151–153, 155, 175–176
Cursor . . . . . . . . 5, 7, 17, 19, 32–37, 56–57,
60, 71, 80, 90, 106, 113, 118
Disk . . . . . . . 2–4, 7–8, 16–17, 19–20, 24–25,
27–28, 31, 42–44, 52–53, 55–56, 58–60,
63–64, 68–69, 73, 76–78, 82, 84, 88, 104–105,
107–108, 111–112, 124, 127–130, 132, 134–135,
140, 145, 148, 151, 154, 170–171, 174–176
Charging indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 40
Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 160
Closed Cover Switch . . . . . . . . . 7, 166–167
CMOS RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 81, 94
Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 151
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . 23, 30, 33, 35, 37,
46–47, 53–54, 64, 72, 136
CPU . . . . 3, 49, 52, 55, 108–109, 114, 120, 165
Custom Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Data . . . . . . . . 4–5, 7, 22, 24, 27, 29–30, 39,
41–43, 46–52, 55, 68–70, 77, 101–102, 105,
125,134–135, 146, 148, 154, 170–172, 174–175
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 68–70, 101
Disk errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Diskette . . . . . . 60, 64, 73, 104, 118, 154, 170
Diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . 60, 64, 118, 170
DC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 14, 145, 148
Display . . . . . . . . 4–7, 13, 15–20, 24–25, 37,
48–49, 52–54, 56–62, 64, 69–71, 73–74,
77, 81–82, 93–94, 100, 108–109, 112, 114,
116, 119, 122, 124, 131, 139–140,
143, 164, 166–168, 171, 173
Dead battery alarm level . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Display compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Dead Battery Suspend Mode . . . 41, 159–160,
162–163
Display panel . . . . . . . . . . 6–7, 13, 15–16,
24–25, 37, 81, 114, 139
Dead Battery Warning condition . . . . . . . 49
DMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 81, 84, 87, 92
Digital PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 138
DMA channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 87, 92
Date . . . . . . . . . . 3, 68–69, 72–73, 120, 150
DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 14, 145, 148
197
Index
I n d e x
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 198
I n d e x
Docking . . . . . . . 10, 128, 144–147, 151, 154
Ethernet. . . . 3–4, 8, 22, 47, 127–128, 139, 147
File transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 55
Docking port . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 128, 145
Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 71, 80, 106,
113, 118, 121–123
Fixed Disk . . . . . . . . . . 104–105, 170–171
Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 144, 154
Double-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 35, 61
Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 54, 56
Extended Memory . . . . . . . . . 74, 143, 170
External Floppy Disk Drive . . . . 8, 42, 68, 88,
128, 140, 145, 148
Floppy disk . . . . . 2–4, 7–8, 17, 19–20, 24–25,
27–28, 31, 42–44, 55, 59–60,
63–64, 68–69, 73, 78, 82, 88, 104, 127–130,
135, 140, 145, 148, 151, 154, 170–171, 175–176
Driver . . . . . . . . 35, 152, 156–158, 169, 176
External monitor . . . . 5, 10, 37, 69, 127–128,
139, 145, 148, 166, 169
Floppy disk drive . . . . 2–4, 7–8, 24, 27–28, 31,
42–44, 59, 63–64, 68, 73, 88, 127–129,
135, 140, 145, 148, 151, 154, 170–171, 175
DVD drive . . . . . . . . 3, 27, 30, 44, 129, 132
F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 70–71, 171
Floppy Disk Drive Access indicator. . . . 31, 42
ECP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
F10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 71, 139, 166, 169
Floppy disk format . . . . . . . . . . 42, 69, 78
ECP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
F2 . . . 17, 19–20, 68, 70–71, 143, 165, 171, 175
Fn. . . . . . . . . . . . 36–37, 69, 139, 166, 169
Electro-static discharge . . . . . . . . . 141, 143
F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 71
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36–37
ErgoTrac . . . . . . . . . 3, 5, 17, 19, 32, 59, 155
F9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
GB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Error message . . . . . . . . . . . 16–17, 19–20,
52, 70–71, 166, 169–171
Faulty battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Half Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fax . . . . . . . . 4, 22–23, 47, 58, 135, 150, 173
ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 143
Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 15, 44–45, 144
Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56, 59, 76–77,
107–108, 112, 132, 174
Drive Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
198
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 199
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
Hard Disk Timeout . . . . . . 53, 107–108, 112
Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . 52–53, 108, 112, 114
Inactivity suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7, 10–11, 13,
15–16, 24, 27–28, 31–32, 34, 36–37,
49, 53, 82, 89–90, 102, 127–128, 139,
145–148, 151, 155–156, 162, 167–168, 171
Hard Drive . . . . . 3–4, 7–8, 11, 17, 19–20, 24,
27–28, 31, 38–39, 41, 46, 49–53, 55,
58–60, 63–64, 69, 78, 104, 108–111,
118, 124–125, 128–129, 132–133,
151, 155, 165, 170–171, 174–176
Inactivity shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Infrared. . . . . . . . . 5, 10, 27, 47–48, 55, 128
Label . . . 2, 4, 11, 22, 42, 45–46, 137, 151–152
Internal Hard Drive. . . . . . . . . . 31, 46, 51,
59, 78, 104, 124–125, 165
LAN . . . . . 4, 27, 38, 40, 47, 96, 135, 139, 164
LBA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Hard Drive Compartment . . . . . . . . . . 11
Internal modem . . . . . . . . 4, 23, 27, 47–48,
55, 96, 128, 138, 173
Hard drive format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 78
Interrupt level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Hardware volume control . . . . . . . 37–38, 55
IrDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 10, 47, 86
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85–88, 92, 96–98
Headphones . . . . . . . . 9, 127–128, 138, 152
joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 91–92, 145
Lithium ion battery . . . . . . 2–4, 8, 14, 16, 29,
38–40, 51, 59, 129–130, 133
Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 91
K56flex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Low battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 162
Icon . . . . . . . . . . 18, 22, 29–30, 33, 35, 38,
40, 53, 56, 60–61, 72, 131, 164
KB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 120
LPT Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Hard Drive Access . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 31, 53
Hard Drive Access Indicator . . . . . . . . . 31
IDE . . . . . . . . . . . . 59–60, 64, 82, 88, 135
LANdock . . . . . . . . 127, 144–147, 154, 156
LBA Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 7, 55, 168
License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–21
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . 67, 70–75, 79–80,
143, 153–156, 165
199
Index
I n d e x
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 200
I n d e x
Main Unit Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 82, 145
NumLk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 28, 31, 36–37
Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Modem . . . . . . . . . . 3–5, 8, 22–23, 27, 38,
47–48, 52, 55–56, 58–59, 96, 111,
128, 135, 138, 149, 151, 157, 164, 173
NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Maximum Performance . . . . . . . . . . 56–58
Monitor . . . . . . . 5, 10, 37, 55, 69, 127–128,
139, 145, 148, 166, 169, 171
Operating system. . . . . . 5, 13, 16–17, 19–20,
22–24, 35, 37, 42–43, 46, 48, 53, 67–70, 72, 82,
104, 106–107, 115–118, 122, 125, 128, 133, 146,
148, 152–153, 155–156, 165, 169–171, 173–176
MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73–74, 120, 143
Mono microphone. . . . . . . . . 5, 9, 128, 138
Output Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Memory . . . . . . . . 11, 40, 42, 49–52, 59, 70,
74, 79–80, 107, 109–111, 120, 122–125,
127–128, 141–143, 151, 156, 170, 172
Mouse . . . . 5, 10, 32–37, 82, 89–90, 102, 114,
127–128, 139, 145–148, 151, 155–156
Parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 81, 87–88,
127–128, 137, 145, 148, 157
Mouse cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33–34, 90
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Memory Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 79–80
MPEG file player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Memory Capacity . . . . . . . . 11, 42, 141–143
Password . . . . . 21, 23, 70, 102–105, 155, 165
Memory upgrade compartment . . . . . 11, 141
Multi-function bay . . . . . . . 2–3, 6–8, 11, 29,
40, 42, 44, 59–64, 68–69,
127, 129–131, 133–135, 144, 161, 163
Memory upgrade module . . . . . . 11, 52, 124,
127–128, 141–143, 156, 170
Multi-Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
PC Card . . . . . . . . 5, 7–8, 24, 28, 31, 51, 55,
111, 128, 136–137, 145, 147, 151, 158, 170
MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Multimedia device . . . . . . 54, 82, 91–92, 152
Microphone . . . . 5–7, 9, 38, 55, 127–128, 138
Numeric keypad . . . . . . . 10, 31, 36–37, 128
Maximum Battery Life . . . . . . 15, 56–58, 179
Maximum Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
200
Password on Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 104
PC Card Access Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PC-Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 151
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 201
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
PCMCIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 55
PHDISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 124–125
Power On Self Test. . . . . . 16–17, 68, 70, 104,
116, 143, 149, 156, 166–167, 170–171
RAM . . . . . . . . . . 4, 49, 135, 143, 170, 172
Real time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
PIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Power Savings . . . . . . . 7, 48, 50–51, 56–58,
71, 108, 112, 162, 164, 167
Recovery CD-ROM . . . 2, 22, 46, 149, 174–175
Pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 94, 168
Power source . . . . . . 16, 41, 50, 150, 161, 163
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 14, 21–23
Plug & Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81–82
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70, 100, 175
Pointing device . . . . . . . . 3, 5–7, 17, 19, 27,
32–37, 59–60, 90, 155
Power switch . . . . . . . . 9, 16, 24–25, 28–29,
41, 58, 68, 102, 110, 137, 141,
143, 145–146, 150, 155, 159–163, 172
Port replicator . . . . . . 10, 127, 144, 146–148
PowerPanel. . . . . . . . . 5, 49–50, 56–59, 107
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16–17, 68, 70, 76,
104, 143, 156, 166–167
PowerPanel Toolbar . . . . . . . . 49–50, 56–57
Resume . . . . . . . . . . 6–7, 25, 29, 41, 49–53,
58–59, 102, 104, 110–111, 114,
155, 161–162, 164, 167–168, 171
Restart . . . . . 18, 23, 25, 31, 42, 49, 52–53, 68,
70, 102, 124–125, 146, 148, 155–158, 170, 175
Power adapter . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 41, 57–58,
65, 134, 141, 159–164
Pre-installed software . . . . . . . 5, 17, 19, 22,
24, 27, 46, 54, 174, 176
Resume On Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Presentation Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
RJ-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 8, 128, 138
Power Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 28, 41, 49–50
Product code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . 4, 8, 47, 128, 139, 145, 147
Power Management . . . . . . . 5, 7, 27, 38–39,
41, 48, 52–58, 67–69, 102,
104, 107, 162, 164, 167–168, 179
Program . . . . . . . . . . 22–23, 47, 54–55, 57,
64, 69–70, 151, 172, 174–175
Save-To-Disk File Allocation. . . 47, 52, 67, 124
Quiet boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Save-to-Disk Mode . . . . . . . . . . 28, 49–52,
58–59, 104, 110–111
Scr Lk Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
201
Index
I n d e x
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 202
I n d e x
SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Shutdown . . . . 18, 41, 137, 147, 151, 155, 164
SDRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4, 120, 141
Software volume control . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Second Lithium ion battery . . . . . . 4, 14, 16,
29, 38, 40
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76–77
Speakerphone . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 47, 55, 58
SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 135, 170
Support representative . . . 11, 39, 52, 54, 102,
134, 150–151, 166–168, 170–172, 178
Suspend . . . . . . . . . 6–7, 14, 16, 25, 28–29,
38–41, 48–53, 56, 58–59, 102,
104, 109–112,114, 133–134, 137,
146–147, 155, 159–164, 167–168
Suspend mode . . . . . . . 7, 14, 16, 28, 38–41,
48–51, 58, 109, 111, 114, 133–134, 137,
146–147, 155, 159–160, 162–163, 167
Security . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 67–71, 101–106,
139, 154–155, 165
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . 49, 52–53, 59, 167
Security Menu. . . . 67, 101, 103–106, 155, 165
Standby Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 112
Serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 86–87, 114,
127–128, 138, 145, 148, 157
Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24, 37, 54, 57,
68, 125, 134, 146–147, 155
Setup utility. 7, 16–17, 19–20, 48, 50–54, 56–58,
67–72, 74–75, 79–81, 84,
89, 91, 93, 95, 97, 99, 101, 103,
106–107, 113, 117–118, 121–123,
143, 152–156, 162, 164–167, 170–172
Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . 6–7, 27–28, 38,
40–41, 49, 110, 159–164
Stereo headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
System memory . . . . . . . . 11, 49–52, 59, 74,
109–111, 142–143, 172
Shadow RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Stereo line in . . . . . . . . . 5, 9, 127–128, 138
System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72–73
Shortcut Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SuperDisk 120 Drive . . . . . . . 61, 63, 68–69
System timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Shorted batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Supervisor password . . . . . . . . . . 103–104
Telephone . . . . . . . 8, 23, 111, 127–128, 138
202
Stereo . . . . . . . . . . 5, 7, 9, 54, 127–128, 138
SVGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 10
System battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
System Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72–73
System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 148
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 203
LifeBook E Series from Fujitsu
TFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 151, 157
Windows Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Theft Prevention Lock . . . . . . . . 9, 127, 139
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 128, 138
Windows Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Tilt Adjustment Feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
User input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108–109
Write protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 104
Time . . . . 9, 13–14, 16–20, 22, 25, 35, 37–38,
40–41, 45–46, 50, 52, 62, 68–69, 72–73,
108–109, 111, 130, 132–134, 138–139,
142, 145, 147, 157, 166–167, 172, 174, 178
User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
XGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Zoomed Video . . . . . . . . . 5, 128, 135–136
Touch sensitive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
VGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Touchpad . . . . . . . . . 3, 5, 17, 19, 32, 34–35
Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Video . . . . . . . 4–5, 37, 52–54, 56, 58–59, 82,
93–94, 107–108, 112–113, 128,
135–136, 139, 151, 166–169, 172
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 16–17, 70, 143,
149–151, 153, 155, 157, 159, 161,
163, 165, 167, 169, 171, 173, 175
Video Timeout . . . . 53, 58, 107–108, 112, 167
Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 47
Unit Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Windows . . . . . . 2, 5, 7, 9–10, 17–25, 29–30,
33, 35–38, 46–47, 49–50,
53–63, 68, 72, 107, 128, 132, 134,
136–138, 144, 146–147, 153, 157, 170, 179
Universal Serial Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 128
USB . . . 5, 9, 127–128, 138, 145, 148, 151, 157
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Virus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 54, 175
203
Index
I n d e x
L Index_E.qxd 10/28/98 10:41 AM Page 204
I n d e x
204
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising